NEC 2400 IPX manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644

Go to page of

A good user manual

The rules should oblige the seller to give the purchaser an operating instrucion of NEC 2400 IPX, along with an item. The lack of an instruction or false information given to customer shall constitute grounds to apply for a complaint because of nonconformity of goods with the contract. In accordance with the law, a customer can receive an instruction in non-paper form; lately graphic and electronic forms of the manuals, as well as instructional videos have been majorly used. A necessary precondition for this is the unmistakable, legible character of an instruction.

What is an instruction?

The term originates from the Latin word „instructio”, which means organizing. Therefore, in an instruction of NEC 2400 IPX one could find a process description. An instruction's purpose is to teach, to ease the start-up and an item's use or performance of certain activities. An instruction is a compilation of information about an item/a service, it is a clue.

Unfortunately, only a few customers devote their time to read an instruction of NEC 2400 IPX. A good user manual introduces us to a number of additional functionalities of the purchased item, and also helps us to avoid the formation of most of the defects.

What should a perfect user manual contain?

First and foremost, an user manual of NEC 2400 IPX should contain:
- informations concerning technical data of NEC 2400 IPX
- name of the manufacturer and a year of construction of the NEC 2400 IPX item
- rules of operation, control and maintenance of the NEC 2400 IPX item
- safety signs and mark certificates which confirm compatibility with appropriate standards

Why don't we read the manuals?

Usually it results from the lack of time and certainty about functionalities of purchased items. Unfortunately, networking and start-up of NEC 2400 IPX alone are not enough. An instruction contains a number of clues concerning respective functionalities, safety rules, maintenance methods (what means should be used), eventual defects of NEC 2400 IPX, and methods of problem resolution. Eventually, when one still can't find the answer to his problems, he will be directed to the NEC service. Lately animated manuals and instructional videos are quite popular among customers. These kinds of user manuals are effective; they assure that a customer will familiarize himself with the whole material, and won't skip complicated, technical information of NEC 2400 IPX.

Why one should read the manuals?

It is mostly in the manuals where we will find the details concerning construction and possibility of the NEC 2400 IPX item, and its use of respective accessory, as well as information concerning all the functions and facilities.

After a successful purchase of an item one should find a moment and get to know with every part of an instruction. Currently the manuals are carefully prearranged and translated, so they could be fully understood by its users. The manuals will serve as an informational aid.

Table of contents for the manual

  • Page 1

    OCTOBER, 2000 NEC Amer ica, Inc. NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 ST OC K # 2 00 774 Circuit Card Manual ®[...]

  • Page 2

    [...]

  • Page 3

    LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NE C America , Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or fe a t ure s , a t a n y ti m e, w i th ou t n o ti c e. NEC A mer i ca , In c. ha s pr ep are d t hi s do cum ent fo r us e by it s emp loy ee s a nd cu stom ers. Th e in forma tion c ont aine d he rein is the prop erty of NE C Americ a, Inc. an[...]

  • Page 4

    [...]

  • Page 5

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 1/9 ND A-2 4296 PA G E N o . ISSU E No . 12345 678 i 1 ii 1 iii 1 iv 1 v 1 vi 1 vii 1 vi ii 1 ix 1 x 1 xi 1 xii 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1[...]

  • Page 6

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 2/ 9 ND A-2 4296 65 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 69 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 1 76 1 77 1 78 1 79 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 86 1 87 1 88 1 89 1 90 1 91[...]

  • Page 7

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 3/ 9 ND A-2 4296 141 1 142 1 143 1 144 1 145 1 146 1 147 1 148 1 149 1 150 1 151 1 152 1 153 1 154 1 155 1 156 1 157 1 158 1 159 1 160 1 161 1 162 1 [...]

  • Page 8

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 4/ 9 ND A-2 4296 217 1 218 1 219 1 220 1 221 1 222 1 223 1 224 1 225 1 226 1 227 1 228 1 229 1 230 1 231 1 232 1 233 1 234 1 235 1 236 1 237 1 238 1 [...]

  • Page 9

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 5/ 9 ND A-2 4296 293 1 294 1 295 1 296 1 297 1 298 1 299 1 300 1 301 1 302 1 303 1 304 1 305 1 306 1 307 1 308 1 309 1 310 1 311 1 312 1 313 1 314 1 [...]

  • Page 10

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 6/ 9 ND A-2 4296 369 1 370 1 371 1 372 1 373 1 374 1 375 1 376 1 377 1 378 1 379 1 380 1 381 1 382 1 383 1 384 1 385 1 386 1 387 1 388 1 389 1 390 1 [...]

  • Page 11

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 7/ 9 ND A-2 4296 445 1 446 1 447 1 448 1 449 1 450 1 451 1 452 1 453 1 454 1 455 1 456 1 457 1 458 1 459 1 460 1 461 1 462 1 463 1 464 1 465 1 466 1 [...]

  • Page 12

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 8/ 9 ND A-2 4296 521 1 522 1 523 1 524 1 525 1 526 1 527 1 528 1 529 1 530 1 531 1 532 1 533 1 534 1 535 1 536 1 537 1 538 1 539 1 540 1 541 1 542 1 [...]

  • Page 13

    ISSU E 1 ISSUE 2 I SSUE 3 ISSUE 4 D A T E O C T O B E R , 2 0 0 0 D AT E D AT E D AT E ISSU E 5 ISSUE 6 I SSUE 7 ISSUE 8 D A TE DA TE DA TE DA TE NEAX240 0 IPX Circuit C ard Man ual Revi si on Sh ee t 9/ 9 ND A-2 4296 597 1 598 1 599 1 600 1 601 1 602 1 603 1 604 1 605 1 606 1 607 1 608 1 609 1 610 1 611 1 612 1 613 1 614 1 615 1 616 1 617 1 618 1 [...]

  • Page 14

    [...]

  • Page 15

    NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 OCTOBER, 2 000 NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual T ABLE OF CONTENTS Pa g e NDA-24296 T ABLE OF CONTENTS Pa g e i Re vision 1.0 LI ST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LIST OF T ABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 16

    T ABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24296 Page ii Revision 1.0 T ABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED ) Page PA -CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 PH- CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 17

    LIST OF FI GURES Figu re Tit le Page N D A-2429 6 LI ST O F FI GURE S Pa g e i i i Revision 1.0 Fi gure 1- 1 Ca rd M ount ing Sl ot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slo t for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 18

    LIST OF FIGU RES N D A -24296 Pa g e i v Re vision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Fig ure 2 -34 Location o f PH-M 16 ( LTST) Card Within the S ystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Figure 2 -3 5 F ace Layout of P H-M16 ( L TST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 19

    N D A-2429 6 LIST OF F IGURES Pag e v Revision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Figure 2 -7 9 F ace Layout of P Z-M 565 (I S AGT ) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 56 Figure 2 -8 0 Loc ation of PZ- ME44 (PC I ME M) Card in t he System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 20

    LIST OF FIGU RES N D A -24296 Pa g e v i Re vision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Fig ure 3 -29 PLO Pin A ss ignm ent f or R ec eiving C lock (ISWM ) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2 Figure 3 -3 0 Cab le Co nnection Diagram (ISWM ) for Accepting Synchron ization C locks from an Exter nal H[...]

  • Page 21

    N D A-2429 6 LIST OF F IGURES Page vii Revision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Figure 3 -7 3 Connec ting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 23 Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 22

    LIST OF FIGU RES N D A -24296 P age viii Re vision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Fig ure 3 -116 F ace La you t of PA-8 RS TK (8R ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 1 Fig ure 3 -117 Location of t he PA- 8RS TM (8 RST ) C ard i n the Syst em . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 23

    N D A-2429 6 LIST OF F IGURES Pa g e i x Revision 1.0 LIST OF FI GURES (CONTINUED) Figu re Tit le Page Fig ure 3 -161 Locat ion of P A-4 D ATB ( D AT) wit hin the S ystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 31 Fig ure 3 -162 F ace La you t of PA -4D A TB ( D A T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 24

    LIST OF FIGU RES ND A-24296 Pa g e x Re vision 1.0 This page is f or your notes.[...]

  • Page 25

    LIST OF T ABLE S Ta b l e T i t l e Pa g e ND A-2 4296 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page xi Revision 1.0 T able 3-1 Balancing Netw ork and T er mina l Im pedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 T able 3-2 A TI Card Lamp Indi cation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 26

    CHAPTER 3 ND A-24296 (E) Pa g e x i i Re vision 1.0 This page is f or your notes.[...]

  • Page 27

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pa ge 1 Revision 1.0 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1. GEN ER AL This manual provi des cir cuit card d e script ions for the NEAX2400 I PX sy stem. This manua l is f or th ose person s invol ved in system se tup and a dministra tion a ctiv ities f or the NEAX2400 I PX. For each cir cuit ca rd t he followi ng ite ms a re ex p la ined : ?[...]

  • Page 28

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Pag e 2 Revision 1.0 2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUI T CARD The contr ol circuit card s for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in the ir dedi cated slot s as shown in Figur e 1- 1 . Th e control circu it cards for the 4 I MG sys t em should be mounted in thei r dedi cated slo ts as shown in Figure 1-2 . The contr ol c ircuit ca r[...]

  • Page 29

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pa ge 3 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-1 C ard Mountin g Slo t f o r the 1 IMG S ys tem 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-SW10(TSW) PH-SW10(TSW) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-[...]

  • Page 30

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Pag e 4 Revision 1.0 Fig ure 1-2 Car d Mo untin g Slot for the 4 IM G Sys tem (1/ 4) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PW[...]

  • Page 31

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pa ge 5 Revision 1.0 Fig ure 1-2 Car d Mo untin g Slot for the 4 IM G Sys tem (2/ 4) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PW[...]

  • Page 32

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Pag e 6 Revision 1.0 Fig ure 1-2 Car d Mo untin g Slot for the 4 IM G Sys tem (3/ 4) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PW[...]

  • Page 33

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pa ge 7 Revision 1.0 Fig ure 1-2 Car d Mo untin g Slot for the 4 IM G Sys tem (4/ 4) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PW[...]

  • Page 34

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Pag e 8 Revision 1.0 Figure 1-3 C ard Mounting Slot for the IP X-U System (1/5) PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG3/7/11/15 Dummy PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG2/6/10/14 TSWM1 PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG1/5/9/13 TSWM0 PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG0/4/8/12 LP CMG NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM ISWM DUMMY CMP CMG SP LMG 4 (0~3) Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mount ed[...]

  • Page 35

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pa ge 9 Revision 1.0 Figure 1-3 C ard Mounting Slot for the IP X-U System (2/5) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-P[...]

  • Page 36

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Page 10 Revision 1.0 Figure 1-3 C ard Mounting Slot for the IP X-U System (3/5) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-P[...]

  • Page 37

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pag e 11 Revision 1.0 Figure 1-3 C ard Mounting Slot for the IP X-U System (4/5) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PI[...]

  • Page 38

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Page 12 Revision 1.0 Figure 1-3 C ard Mounting Slot for the IP X-U System (5/5) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PIM[...]

  • Page 39

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pag e 13 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-4 Car d Mountin g Slot f or the IPX -UM G System (1/ 5) PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG3/7/11/15 Dummy PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG2/6/10/14 TSWM1 PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG1/5/9/13 TSWM0 PIM PIM PIM PIM IMG0/4/8/12 LP CMG NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM ISWM DUMMY CMP CMG SP LMG 4 (0~3) 00 00 01 01 02 02 03 04 03 04 05 06 07 08[...]

  • Page 40

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Page 14 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-4 Car d Mountin g Slot f or the IPX -UM G System (2/ 5) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B (PWR[...]

  • Page 41

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pag e 15 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-4 Car d Mountin g Slot f or the IPX -UM G System (3/ 5) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B (PW[...]

  • Page 42

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Page 16 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-4 Car d Mountin g Slot f or the IPX -UM G System (4/ 5) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PW[...]

  • Page 43

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1 Pag e 17 Revision 1.0 Figu re 1-4 Car d Mountin g Slot f or the IPX -UM G System (5/ 5) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM3 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM2 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM1 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(P[...]

  • Page 44

    CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296 Page 18 Revision 1.0 This page is f or your notes.[...]

  • Page 45

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 19 Revision 1.0 CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFEREN C E This ch ap t er exp l ai n s the fol l o w ing item s f or each C o n tr o l Circ uit C ard. • General Fu nction Exp la ins t h e gen era l fu n ct i o n an d pur pose of each co n t ro l ci rc uit c ard. • Mountin g Location/ Condition Explai ns the mount ing [...]

  • Page 46

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 20 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board SN16 95 CP RB F- A CPU Boar d 1. General Fu nction The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U sys tem c onsists of the fo llowing compo nents. (a) CPU BOARD: Cont ains the Main Processo r Uni t (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mby t e of R andom Access Memory (RAM). This board m ay also c ontain t[...]

  • Page 47

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 21 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board The CPR in I PX-UMG syste m consist s of the foll owing compon ent s. (a) CPU BOARD: Cont ains Syst em P rocessor Unit ( SP)/Common Main Processor Un it (CMP)/Local Processor Uni t (LP) , R OM , a nd 128 to 256 Mbyte o f Rando m Acc ess Memor y (RAM). This board may also contai n [...]

  • Page 48

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 22 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The CPR is c omposed of th e CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and P W R a nd is located in t he Local Processor Module (L PM ) a s shown in Fig ure 2- 2 . Since the CPR provi des the Industr ial Stan dard Archite ctur e (ISA) bus and Periphe ral Component I n[...]

  • Page 49

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 23 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board When the SN1 695 C PRBF-A is u se d i n the IPX-UMG system, t he CPR is mounte d on each proce ssor mod- ule (SP , CMP , and LPs) as sho wn in Fig ure 2-3 . As to the mount ing loc a tion of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP , and othe r cir cu it car ds wi thi n t he CPR, re fer to Figur e 2-5 .[...]

  • Page 50

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 24 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Figure 2-4 CPR Loc ation f or IPX-UM G System PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) /PZ-M565 (ISAGT) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD) Note 3 PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI) Note 2 PZ-PW92 (PWR) PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Note 4 CPR SP/CMP /LP ISWM / Dummy / PIM0 Note 1 Note 1 : PZ-GT2 0 (ISAGT ) [...]

  • Page 51

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 25 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The CPR contai ns the foll owing lamps, switche s and connectors. Slots 0-3 provide th e Per ipheral Component Interconnec t (PCI) bus, and S lots 4-6 a re the Ind ustrial Standa rd Architect ure ( ISA) bus . Fig ure 2-5 Fr ont[...]

  • Page 52

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 26 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR i n SP for IPX-UMG System Figure 2-7 Fr ont V iew of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System SW DC-40V~-58.6V PZ-PW92 MBR CPU OPE ON HDD -48V OUT ON OFF 5A 125V AC/DC I O PALM ON ALM OUTPWR INPWR ON 14 IMG1 SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS SENSE CPURST SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 [...]

  • Page 53

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 27 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board Figure 2-8 Front V iew of C PR in LP for IPX -U MG System SW DC-40V~-58.6V PZ-PW92 MBR CPU OPE ON -48V OUT ON OFF 5A 125V AC/DC I O PALM ON ALM OUTPWR INPWR ON 14 IMG1 SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS SENSE CPURST SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 WDT IMG2 IMG0 AB IMG3 ON 11 2 SYSTEM SELECT1 ON 13 20 S[...]

  • Page 54

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 28 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp Indi cations va ry depen ding on the node. The follo wing shows the lamp indic ations for the C PR in the IM G for 1- IMG , 4- IMG , an d IPX -U sys tem . [Lam p In d i ca tion s fo r 1-IM G / 4 -IM G/ IPX - U S ystem ] Note: No l amp i ndicatio n in S TBY m[...]

  • Page 55

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 29 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board Note: The segment spi nning i ndicati on shows a processin g status has comp let ed s uccessfully, o r “ E ” indicates the proce ssing failed. LAM P NAME DESCRIPTION STATUS (DSP) Two sets of “ 7-segment LED ” s how the CPR pr oce ssing s tatu s. The CPR proces sing status [...]

  • Page 56

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 30 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board The fol lowin g sh ows the lamp indicat ion for the CPR i n t he SP , C MP , a nd LP for IPX- UMG system. [Lamp Indicat ions for the CPR in S P] [Lamp Indicat ions for the CPR in C MP] Note: No l amp i ndicatio n in S TBY mod e. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION ON (P W R ) Gr e en Li gh t[...]

  • Page 57

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 31 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board [Lamp Indicat ions for the CPR in LP ] Note: No l amp i ndicatio n in S TBY mod e. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION ON (PWR) Green Light s gre en when the PWR is su p pl ied . ALM (PWR) Red Light s red wh en the P WR is abn ormal. WDT (DSP) Red Li ghts re d when W a tch- dog Tim er (WD[...]

  • Page 58

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 32 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note: The segment spi nning i ndicati on shows a processin g status has comp let ed s uccessfully, o r ind ic a te s “ E ” meaning the processing faile d. LAM P NAME DESCRIPTION ST A TU S (DSP) T wo sets of “ 7-se gmen t LED ” sho w th e CPR proc ess ing st atus . The CPR pro[...]

  • Page 59

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 33 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board 5. Switch Setti ngs [for 1-IM G /4-IM G/ IPX- U Sy st em] Note: Make -busy of t his circuit c ard is not al lowed whi le the Fl oppy Disk Dri v e or Hard Disk Drive is being acce sse d. SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SE TTIN G ME ANI NG SW (PWR) — ON × PWR is supp[...]

  • Page 60

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 34 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note: The SENSE switc h designa tes the C PR processing stat us. The new processing stat us starts when the CPRRST switch on t he DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch. SWITCH NAME SE TTING STANDARD SE TTIN G MEANING SENSE (DSP) Note 1 The followi ng three processes are exe c[...]

  • Page 61

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 35 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board [for IPX-UMG System] Note: Make -busy of t his circuit c ard is not al lowed whi le the Fl oppy Disk Dri v e or Hard Disk Drive is being acces sed. This s witch is used on t he CPR mounted in SP only. SWITCH NAME SWIT C H NO. SET TING STANDARD SE TTIN G ME ANI NG SW (PWR) — ON ?[...]

  • Page 62

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 36 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note: This s witch setting is valid when the “ EMA SUP ” s w itch is ON (UP side). SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SE TTIN G ME ANI NG SYS TEM SELECT2 (DSP) 1~4 OF F × Not u sed. 5~8 Physi cal PBI Number (Eq uipment Number) Note 1: Physical PBI No. must b e the same[...]

  • Page 63

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 37 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board Note: Refe r to the fol lowing figur e and table for the PBI Number and the Equipme nt Number for I PX-UMG syst em. T he same PBI N umber must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual c onf ig uration. Processor Name PBI No. CP U Ac commodation Equipm ent No. SP 02 15 CMP [...]

  • Page 64

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 38 Revision 1.0 SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note 1: The SENSE swi tch designa tes the CPR proce ssing stat us. The ne w proce ssing stat us st arts when the CPRRST switch on t he DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch. Note 2: This swit ch is used on the CPR mounted in SP on l y. Note 3: Connection Hold Res tart is pro [...]

  • Page 65

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 39 Revision 1.0 SN16 95 C PRBF-A CPU Board 6. E x te rn al I nter face See the NEAX240 0 IPX Install ation Manual. 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NA ME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS SW (PWR) MB ( P WR: PZ-PW106) MB ( F DD/HDD) MBR (DSP) SYSTEM S ELEC T0 (DSP) SYSTEM SELE CT1 (DSP) SYST EM S ELEC T2 (DSP) SE NS E (DSP) ON OFF ON ON[...]

  • Page 66

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 40 Revision 1.0 PH- GT09 Gate PH-GT09 Gate 1. General Fu nction The PH - GT0 9 (GT ) circ uit ca rd p rovides both t he TS W I/O Lo cal bus an d t he M ISC bus interfa ce. T he CPR control s TSW , PLO, DLKC , and MISC via the I SA G T and GT . Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT 09 (GT) Card in the System PLO0 PLO1 TDSW03 TDSW I/O[...]

  • Page 67

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 41 Revision 1.0 PH-G T09 Gate 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the TSWM of t he slo t sho w n b el o w. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 2-10 . Fi gur e 2 -1 0 Face Layou t of PH -G T09 (GT ) 0[...]

  • Page 68

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 42 Revision 1.0 PH- GT09 Gate 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . Note: Pri or to extr acting the GT car d, flip the MBR switc h o n an d then fl ip the M[...]

  • Page 69

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 43 Revision 1.0 PH-G T10 Inp u t Ou tp ut Gat e PH-GT10 Inpu t Outp ut Gate 1. General Fu nction The PH-GT10 circuit card prov ides the TSW I/O bus in te rf ace allo wing the CPU b oa rd to contr ol the TSW , HSW , and P LO card s in the Inte r-nod e Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also is equip ped [...]

  • Page 70

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 44 Revision 1.0 PH- GT10 Inp u t Ou tp ut Gat e Figure 2 - 1 2 Loc ation of PH- GT10 ( I OGT) for IPX-UMG Syste m HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 LANI LANI P-BUS LANI LANI P-BUS HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 RES CPU CPU MMC MISC EMA RES RES RES (IOGT1) PH-GT10 (IOGT0) PH-GT10 ISAGT ISAGT ISAGT2 ISAGT2 [...]

  • Page 71

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 45 Revision 1.0 PH-G T10 Inp u t Ou tp ut Gat e 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots s hown b e low . 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in Fi gu r e 2 - 13 . Figure 2-13 F ace Lay out [...]

  • Page 72

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 46 Revision 1.0 PH- GT10 Inp u t Ou tp ut Gat e 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . 6. E x te rn al I nter face See the NEAX240 0 IPX Install ation Manual[...]

  • Page 73

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 47 Revision 1.0 PA-P C94 Data Link Multip lexer PA-PC94 Data L ink Multiple xer 1. General Fu nction This circ uit card mainl y p rovid es the two function s: 1) collec tion of BLF/TGBL informati on (associate d with Att e ndant /Desk Console operat ion) fr om DLKC cards of al l nodes in an IPX-U/I PX-UMG syst em, and 2) d[...]

  • Page 74

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 48 Revision 1.0 PA- PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition When t his circui t car d is us ed in a si ngle co n figuratio n . Mount thi s circuit card in a ny of the shad ed slots: Mountin g condit ions of t his cir cuit ca rd ar e as foll o ws: 1. Thi s circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07[...]

  • Page 75

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 49 Revision 1.0 PA-P C94 Data Link Multip lexer 3. Fac e Layout of Lamps and S wi tch es The face layo ut of lamps and switches is s hown bel o w. Fi gur e 2 -1 5 Fa ce Layout of PA-P C9 4 (D LMX) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low: P A-P C94 La [...]

  • Page 76

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 50 Revision 1.0 PA- PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITC H NAME SW IT C H No. SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP Circuit car d mak e-b usy . DO WN Circuit car d make -busy c ancel MNT 0O F[...]

  • Page 77

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 51 Revision 1.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power PA-PW54-A Dual P ower 1. General Fu nction The P A-PW54-A (DPWR) c ircuit c ard supplies operating p ower to circui t c ards l ocated i n t he PI M. T he - 48 V input po wer s ource, whi ch is con v erte d to +5 V , -5 V , and +12 V , i s dist rib uted to each cir cuit card in the PIM. [...]

  • Page 78

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 52 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 54-A Dual Power 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition s This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the follo wing s lot. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PI M Moun tin g Modul e PIM (P A-P W54-A ) DPWR[...]

  • Page 79

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 53 Revision 1.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 2-17 . Figure 2 -17 Face Layout o f PA-PW 54-A (DPWR) Car d -48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW SW4 FRONT VIEW PA- PW54 -A 5.0 A 0.5 A RGUOUT 0.[...]

  • Page 80

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 54 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 54-A Dual Power 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs This ci rcu i t ca rd ha s the fol l ow i n g s w itche s . 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re quired. LAM P N AM E COL OR S T A TE +80V ON Gre en [...]

  • Page 81

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 55 Revision 1.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS – 48 V RES ET MB DO W N Circuit car d Make -bus y cancel SW4 20 [ Hz] 90 [ Vrm s] ON 12[...]

  • Page 82

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 56 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 54-B Dual Power PA-PW54-B Dual P ower 1. General Fu nction The P A- PW54- B (DPWR ) cir c uit car d supplies operatin g p ower to cir cuit cards ac commodated in the PIM. The - 48V input p o wer s ource, which is c on ve rted to + 5V , -5V , and +12V , is distrib uted to e ach circuit c ard in the PIM.[...]

  • Page 83

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 57 Revision 1.0 PA-PW54-B Dual Power 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition s This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the follo wing s lot. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DPWR (P A-PW54-B) PIM[...]

  • Page 84

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 58 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 54-B Dual Power 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 2-19 . Figu re 2 -19 Face Layo u t of P A-P W54- B ( DP WR) Card -48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW SW4 FRONT VIEW PA- PW54 - B 5.0 A 0.5 A RGU[...]

  • Page 85

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 59 Revision 1.0 PA-PW54-B Dual Power 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs This ci rcu i t ca rd ha s the fol l ow i n g s w itche s . 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re quired. LAM P N AM E COL OR S T A T[...]

  • Page 86

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 60 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 54-B Dual Power 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SW ITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS – 48 V RES ET MB DO W N Ci rcuit ca rd m ake b usy canc el SW4 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] ON 12[...]

  • Page 87

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 61 Revision 1.0 PA-PW55-A Powe r PA-PW55-A Po w e r 1. General Fu nction The P A-PW55-A (P W R) c ircuit c ard supplies ope rating p ower t o circuit cards loca t ed in the P IM. The -48 V input po wer sourc e, which is con v ert ed to +5 V , -5 V , a nd +12 V , is dis trib uted t o each circuit card in the asso ci at ed P[...]

  • Page 88

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 62 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 55-A Powe r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition s This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the follo wing s lots. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PW R ( P A-PW55-A) PIM Mount in g Modul e PIM[...]

  • Page 89

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 63 Revision 1.0 PA-PW55-A Powe r 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown be lo w. Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Ca rd -48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW SW4 FRONT VIEW PA- PW55 -A 5.0 A 0.5 A RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC +80VOUT [...]

  • Page 90

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 64 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 55-A Powe r 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs This ci rcu i t ca rd ha s the fol l ow i n g s w itche s . 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re quired. LAM P N AM E COL OR S T A TE +80V ON Gre en Re m[...]

  • Page 91

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 65 Revision 1.0 PA-PW55-A Powe r 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS – 48 V RE SET MB DO WN Circ uit ca rd Make-bus y cancel . SW4 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] ON 12[...]

  • Page 92

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 66 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 55-B Powe r PA-PW55-B Po w e r 1. General Fu nction The P A-PW55-B (PWR) cir cuit ca rd supp lies o perating power to circuit car ds accommodate d in the PIM. The - 48V input p o wer s ource, which is c on ve rted to + 5V , -5V , and +12V , is distrib uted to e ach circuit c ard in the assoc iated PIM.[...]

  • Page 93

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 67 Revision 1.0 PA-PW55-B Powe r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition s This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the follo wing s lots. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR ( P A-PW55-B) PIM[...]

  • Page 94

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 68 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 55-B Powe r 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 2-23 . Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Ca rd -48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW PA- PW55 -B 5.0 A 0.5 A RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC +80V[...]

  • Page 95

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 69 Revision 1.0 PA-PW55-B Powe r 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs This ci rcu i t ca rd ha s the fol l ow i n g s w itche s . 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re quired. LAM P N AM E COL OR S T A TE +8[...]

  • Page 96

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 70 Revision 1.0 PA-PW 55-B Powe r 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SW ITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE RE M ARKS – 48 V RES ET MB DO W N Ci rcuit ca rd m ake b usy canc el SW4 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] ON 12[...]

  • Page 97

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 71 Revision 1.0 PH -DK 10 Display Pane l Controller PH-DK10 Displa y P an el Contr oller 1. General Fu nction The main fun ctions of the PH-DK10 card are as foll ows : (a) to se nd out the system opera ting statu s, alarm an d clock i nformation to the Display Panel. (b) to co l le ct t he MJ / MN/ S UP alar m infor ma t i[...]

  • Page 98

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 72 Revision 1.0 PH- DK10 Display Panel Controll e r Figure 2-24 Locat ion of PH- DK10 (DSPC) RELAY RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M22 CMP ISEL PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-DK10 SP RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M22 SEL AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) RELAY LMG CMG RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M[...]

  • Page 99

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 73 Revision 1.0 PH -DK 10 Display Pane l Controller 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in Fi gu r e 2 - 25 . Fi gur e 2 -2 5 Face Layout of [...]

  • Page 100

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 74 Revision 1.0 PH- DK10 Display Panel Controll e r 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings f or t his cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the table belo w . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE OPE/MB Gre en L ight s when this ci rcuit ca rd is[...]

  • Page 101

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 75 Revision 1.0 PH -DK 10 Display Pane l Controller 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fi gur e 2 -2 6 Connec tio n of Ala rm In dic atin g Pan el 01 02 03 04 05 01 02 03 04 05 6-BELL 8-MNA 9-SUPA 10-MJA 33-MNB 34-SUPB 35-MJB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) MDF MJ/MN/BELL -48V (RPT0) G (RPT1) AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL MDF MJ M[...]

  • Page 102

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 76 Revision 1.0 PH- DK10 Display Panel Controll e r 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB ON[...]

  • Page 103

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 77 Revision 1.0 PH-I O24 Input/Output Co ntroller PH-IO24 Inpu t/Outp ut Contr o ller 1. General Fu nction The PH-I O24 (IOC) circuit c ard supplie s the system with a se rial inter face, which c onforms to RS-232C , betwee n e xternal equip ment suc h as the Mainte nance Administra tion T e rminal (MA T), Statio n Mes sag[...]

  • Page 104

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 78 Revision 1.0 PH- IO24 Input/Ou tput Controller 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The IOC card s can be pl aced in th e shaded slo ts (0 2, 03) as sh own be l ow. Note: F irmw a re SP- 3 290 IO 2 4 L V2 P ROG -A i s requ ir e d i n th e H o te l sy s te m f o r P M S and Hote l Prin t er . 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc [...]

  • Page 105

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 79 Revision 1.0 PH-I O24 Input/Output Co ntroller 4. Lamp Indica tions The table belo w sho w s l amp indicat ions on this cir cuit card. 5. Switch Setti ngs The follo wing is a brie f descripti on of the switches on thi s circuit card. When a switc h has a stan dard se t tin g , it is ind i ca te d w i th “ × ” in th[...]

  • Page 106

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 80 Revision 1.0 PH- IO24 Input/Ou tput Controller 6. E x te rn al I nter face As illust r ated in F igu re 2-29 , the 68PH S 2POR TS CA -A cable is r equired t o connect e xternal equi pm ent su ch a s th e MA T , SM D R, MC I, and PR T . Figure 2-29 Extern al Cab le Conn ection for PH-IO 24 (IOC) Securely insert the connec[...]

  • Page 107

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 81 Revision 1.0 PH-I O24 Input/Output Co ntroller 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH S HAPE REMARKS MB MBR SW50 Mean ing of SW50-1: ON: This card is used as the No. 1 cir cuit card. OFF : This c ard i s used as th e N o. 0 ci rcu it c ard . 1 ON 2 3 4[...]

  • Page 108

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 82 Revision 1.0 PH- M22 MMC PH-M22 MMC 1. General Fu nction The main fun ctions of the PH-M22 circ uit card are as foll ows : • to co llect k ey se tting i nformat ion on the TOPU of the ISW and send the inf ormatio n to the ISW/the oth e r L N s , d ep en d i n g o n t h e IS EL key se ttin g o n t he I S W . ( f o r I P[...]

  • Page 109

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 83 Revision 1.0 PH-M22 MMC Figure 2 -31 L ocation of PH- M22 (MMC) i n IP X-UMG System RELAY RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M22 CMP ISEL PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-DK10 SP RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M22 SEL AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) RELAY LMG CMG RECEI VER EMA PH-PC43 PH-M22 RE[...]

  • Page 110

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 84 Revision 1.0 PH- M22 MMC 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots s hown b e low . 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in Fi gu r e 2 - 32 . Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH- M22 ( MMC) 00 01[...]

  • Page 111

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 85 Revision 1.0 PH-M22 MMC 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings f or t his cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the table belo w . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE OPE Gre en Light s when t his cir cuit ca rd is in op eratio n . SWITC H N[...]

  • Page 112

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 86 Revision 1.0 PH- M22 MMC 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fi gur e 2 -3 3 Connec tio n of Ala rm In dic atin g Pan el Note: Exte rnal c onnection for Alarm I ndicator is not us ed in IPX-UMG system. 01 02 03 04 05 01 02 03 04 05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MPALM EXTAA BELAA - MNAA SUPAA MJAA 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37[...]

  • Page 113

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 87 Revision 1.0 PH-M22 MMC 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB Note: Normal ope rating mode is down. ON[...]

  • Page 114

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 88 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test PH-M16 Line T est 1. General Fu nction This circ uit card contr olled b y CP U is used for li ne test of a subscriber ’ s lin e. The circui t car d suppor ts sendi ng Howler T one to exter nal test equipm ent, besides the circui t card can detect or s end var i ous ton es, and send P B (D[...]

  • Page 115

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 89 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The L TS T circuit car d can be accommo dated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02 ) as sh own be low: Note: IPX: Sl ot 00, Slot 01 , Slot 02. IPX-U: Slo t 01, Slot 02 (Consi dering PH-M22 MMC) 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayo[...]

  • Page 116

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 90 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test 4. Lamp Indica tions 5. Switch Setti ngs LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTIO N OPE/MB Gree n T his c ir cuit ca rd is o pera ti ng in no rma l mod e . Red Th is c ircui t card is Make -bus y . SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETT ING MEANING MB UP Circui t card Mak e-b usy DO WN Ci rcuit c[...]

  • Page 117

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 91 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test 6. E xt erna l Interfac e Figu re 2- 36 LT Co nnector Lead Ac c omm odati on 00 0 1 02 03 04 PH- M1 6 PH- M1 6 PH-M16 Cir cuit Card Ba ckboard Conne ctor Connecto r Name Slot Num ber LPM LPM Ba ckboard MI SC Cir cuit Card Ba ckboard Conn ector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC C ABLE MISC Connec t[...]

  • Page 118

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 92 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test Figu re 2-36 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITC H NAME SWITCH SHAP E REMA RKS MB SW0 OUT A OUT A TE INA INB TA 1 TB1 TM RA RB M TA TB E B A LT S T TL T LC PBX MD P ON ( MB) OFF 1 ON 2 3 4 56 7 8[...]

  • Page 119

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 93 Revision 1.0 PH-P C36 Mul tiple xer PH-PC36 Mult iplex er 1. General Fu nction The PH -PC 36 (M UX ) circ uit ca rd i s an i nter face card f or m ounting line circu its and/or trunks. In between the CPR and the Port Microprocesso r ( PM) of t he line/t runk cir cui t, this circui t card provides an in terface for P M c[...]

  • Page 120

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 94 Revision 1.0 PH- PC36 Mu ltiple xer Figure 2-38 Lo cation of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in th e 4 IMG System TDSW 13 TDSW 03 MUX MUX MUX MUX PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 3 TDSW 12 TDSW 02 MUX MUX MUX MUX PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM B[...]

  • Page 121

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 95 Revision 1.0 PH-P C36 Mul tiple xer Figure 2-39 L ocation of PH-PC36 (MUX) C ard in t he I PX-U/IPX-UMG System MUX00 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK DLKC0 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 MUX02 MUX03 MUX10 MUX11 MUX12 MUX13 TSW00 TSW10 TSW01 TSW11 TSW02 TSW12 TSW03 TS[...]

  • Page 122

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 96 Revision 1.0 PH- PC36 Mu ltiple xer The PCM highwa y running is illustrat ed in Figure 2- 40 . The r e are sixt een 2 Mbps PCM highways ( HW0 - HW15) in t he PIM. Each P CM highway runs from a card slot to th e MUX circuit card. F or instance, highwa y number ze ro (HW0) appe ars in S lot 04 an d also Slot 0 5, thus th e[...]

  • Page 123

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 97 Revision 1.0 PH-P C36 Mul tiple xer 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition Fo r the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 ( MUX) card i s mounted in the PI M 1, 2, and 3. For the 4 IM G s y s te m, th e PH-P C3 6 (M UX ) c ard is req u i red in al l PI Ms . 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps ,[...]

  • Page 124

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 98 Revision 1.0 PH- PC36 Mu ltiple xer 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s hown in the tabl e belo w . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . LAMP NAME COLO R ST A TE MUX A CT Gre en Rema ins lit whil e th[...]

  • Page 125

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Pag e 99 Revision 1.0 PH-P C36 Mul tiple xer 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fo r the 1 IMG syste m , t he cable conne c tions bet we en the MUX and t he TSW a re i llustrated in Figu r e 2-42 . Figure 2-42 E xternal Interface for PH-P C36 TSW #0 MUX #0 MUX #0 MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #0 TSW #1 MT24 TSW CA-180 MT24 TSW CA-140 MT24 T[...]

  • Page 126

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 100 Revision 1.0 PH- PC36 Mu ltiple xer The cabl e connec tions between th e MUX and t he TSW are ill ustrate d in Figure 2-43 . As see n in this il lustration , the c able connected to the f ront of th e MUX le a ds to the “ MUX### ” connect or on t he Back Wired B oar d (BWB) of the TSWM . See the NEAX 2400 I PX Ins t[...]

  • Page 127

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 101 Revision 1.0 PH-P C36 Mul tiple xer 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB SW0 1 ON 1 ON 2 3 4[...]

  • Page 128

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 102 Revision 1.0 PH- PC20 Data Link Co ntroller PH-PC20 Data Link Contr oller 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit car d simul taneously provi des all Att endant Consol es ( ATTs) in the sy stem (e xcept the 1-IMG syste m) with infor mation such as the te rmination /answer/r eleas e (abandoned) inf ormati on of A TT calls, or[...]

  • Page 129

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 103 Revision 1.0 PH-P C20 Data L ink Co ntroller 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches and conne ctors of this circuit car d is s ho wn in F igu r e 2 - 45 . Fig ur e 2-4 5 Face La yout of the P C - PH20 C ar d 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit ca[...]

  • Page 130

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 104 Revision 1.0 PH- PC20 Data Link Co ntroller No cable connecti ons are re quired. 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB ON[...]

  • Page 131

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 105 Revision 1.0 PH-P C45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller PH-PC45 Em erg e nc y Al ar m Con t ro lle r 1. General Fu nction The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit c ard det ects v ari ous kinds of al arms which mig ht occur i n the syst em, and send s out infor ma tion about the de tected a lar m to the circ uits c once rned. This circuit c[...]

  • Page 132

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 106 Revision 1.0 PH- PC45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as s hown b e lo w. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 2-47 . Figure 2-47 F ace Layou [...]

  • Page 133

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 107 Revision 1.0 PH-P C45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . Note: Se t CP USE L swit ch down ward , if a si ngle CPU system.[...]

  • Page 134

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 108 Revision 1.0 PH- PC45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO SET T IN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW62 1 ON Po wer Shu t Down ( PSDN) funct ion (use d in Australi a only ) OFF × 2 ON OFF × 3 ON OFF × 4 ON OFF × SW65 1 ON × Output t he CPU-A C T Signal t o the anothe r EMA (when this circ uit c ard i [...]

  • Page 135

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 109 Revision 1.0 PH-P C45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller Note: S W 9 2 and S W A0 a r e u s e d i n t h e 1 I M G s y s t e m o n l y . SWITCH NAM E SW IT C H NO SETTI NG S T AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW92 Note 1 2 3 4 SW A0 Note 1 MUSI C CH0 sele ct io n. T his se lectio n i s v a lid w hen SW70 -1 is O FF . 2 3 4 ON Not us ed[...]

  • Page 136

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 110 Revision 1.0 PH- PC45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller 6. E x te rn al I nter face Externa l equipment m ay be c onnected to t his circ uit card. The physic a l connection d iagram fo r the ext ernal equip ment for Music-On- Hold and Ext ernal Alarm is s ho wn in Figure 2 - 48 . Fi gur e 2 -4 8 Connec t ion of Ala rm Ind ic [...]

  • Page 137

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 111 Revision 1.0 PH-P C45 Emergenc y Alarm Controller 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAP E REMARKS MB EMA -S UP CPU-S EL NMI-SEL SW A0 SW 62 SW 65 SW 70 SW 73 SW 92 ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 123 4 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON 123 4 ON[...]

  • Page 138

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 112 Revision 1.0 PH- PW14 Power Switch PH-PW14 P ower S witc h 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit card is a powe r supply c a rd that supplies D C - 48 V ope rating po wer t o the cir cuit car ds mounted in the TSWM. It a lso p rovid es th e DC-DC co nv erter func tion which gen erates outpu t power DC +5 V, -5 V , a nd +12[...]

  • Page 139

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 113 Revision 1.0 PH- PW14 Po we r S w i t c h 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition s This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the follo wing s haded slot s (00, 0 1). 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face l ayout of lamps, switches, a nd connector s for thi s circ uit card is shown in Figure 2-50 . Figure 2-50[...]

  • Page 140

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 114 Revision 1.0 PH- PW14 Power Switch 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Stand ar d s et ting s f or various s w itche s o n t h i s cir cuit card ar e s hown in t he ta bl e b elo w. 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re [...]

  • Page 141

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 115 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch PH-SW10 Time Divisio n Switch 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ard combines the T ime Di vision Switch ( TSW) with INT , P LO, M UX, a nd CFT . The TSW capacit y is 2048 × 204 8 t ime slots, and i t allo ws non-bl ock switching f or the maxim um IPX conf iguration. The I[...]

  • Page 142

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 116 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch Figure 2-52 sho ws th e cloc k signal r outing around the Phase Lock ed Oscil lator (PLO). Figu re 2-52 PLO Fun c ti on Diagr am When t he system operate s as the clock so ur ce offic e of the di gital ne twork , t he OSC ( P A-CK14) c ard i s requir e d, and th e OSC s uppli[...]

  • Page 143

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 117 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch The PLO can output the clock sig nals (CLK) and the fra me hea d sign als (FH) as follows: • 32.768 MHz CLK • 8 KHz FH • 5 m s ec × “ n ” FH (for wireless module ) . The M UX performs multipl exing/de -multiple xing o f the 2 Mbps PC M hig hwa ys runni ng in PIM 0,[...]

  • Page 144

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 118 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard is mounted in P IM numbe r zero (0) of t he slot sho wn bel ow . 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches and conne ctors i s s hown in Figur e 2 -54 . Figure 2-54 F ace La[...]

  • Page 145

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 119 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE TSW AC T Green Remains lit w h il e the TSW block is in A CT sta te . Red Remains lit whil e the T SW block is in Make -bus y state. Of f Remains off[...]

  • Page 146

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 120 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . SYNC Green Remains li t whil e the syst em is sync hronize d w ith the networ k. OFF Remains of f when a ny of t he fol lowi ng h av e oc curred. • DCS cl ock failur[...]

  • Page 147

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 121 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch Note: When MUX c ar d mode ( SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT func tions ar e valid . M UX 1 is used for a con- nection to T SW (Don ’ t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXA C T , M0SY , CFT , and PMCA ar e valid, other LED is not l it. In this mode , only SW03 is v alid. SWITCH NAM [...]

  • Page 148

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 122 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST AND ARD SE TTIN G ME ANI NG SW11 1 ON PLO oper ates as the clock subordinate o ffi ce. OFF PLO operates as t he clock source o ffice . 2 ON Digita l Clock Suppl y ro ute zero (DCS 0) is u sed. OFF Digita l Clock Suppl y route zero (DCS 0)[...]

  • Page 149

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 123 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch 6. E x te rn al I nter face When thi s cir cuit ca rd i s used i n “ clock subordi nate of fice, ” c lock si gnals fro m DTI, CC T, P RT mu st be e xtracted. See Fi gure 2-56 for m ore in format ion. When this cir cuit ca rd i s used in “ cloc k source of fi ce, ” cab[...]

  • Page 150

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 124 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch Figu re 2-56 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m DCS TS W #1 TS W #0 /PR T CCT/DTI CCT/DTI /PR T CCT/DTI /PRT CCT/DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DCSA1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU[...]

  • Page 151

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 125 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch The f ro nt cabl e connecti ons are s how n in Figur e 2-57 . Figu re 2-57 Fr ont Cab le Conne ctio ns for PH- SW 10 TSW #0 MUX #0 MUX #0 MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #0 TSW #1 MT24 TSW CA-180 MT24 TSW CA-140 MT24 TSW CA-90 PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0[...]

  • Page 152

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 126 Revision 1.0 PH- SW10 Ti me Divisi on Switch 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAP E REMARKS MB TSW MBR PLOMB SW 03 SW 04 SW 11 SW 12 ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 678 1[...]

  • Page 153

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 127 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch PH-SW12 Time Divisio n Switch 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ard pro vides the T ime Div ision Switch (TSW) and I NT function f or the syst em. Ea ch TSW card is capable of 8192 × 204 8 Ti me Sl ot (TS) s witching for an I nter face M odule Group ( IMG). F our cards al[...]

  • Page 154

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 128 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch The T ONE ROM loca t e d on this circuit card contains t he audible tones, such as Dial T one, Busy T one, Ring Back T one, etc. The music on hold so urce, eithe r the MUSIC ROM or the ex ter nal sourc e v ia FM lead, i s locate d o n th e P LO card. The tone and the music ar[...]

  • Page 155

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 129 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch Figure 2-60 Sp eech Pat h Mem ory ( SP M) for Voi ce Pro mpt Fun ction 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This circuit car d is mounte d in t he TS WM of the slot shown belo w . The IPX-U system accommodate s two TS WMs (T SW M0/1 ). PIM 3 [SPM for music channel 16-29] MG = 01,[...]

  • Page 156

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 130 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch The defin itions for the TS W 00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are list ed below. • 4-IM G S yste m • IPX-U syst em This c ard is mounte d in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U sys tem. • Fo r the card i n TSWM0 SYMB OL SYS TEM CONT ROLL ED IMG TSW 00 0 IMG 0 TSW 01 IMG 1 TSW 02 IMG 2 T[...]

  • Page 157

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 131 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch • For the c ard in T SW M 1 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 2-61 . Figure 2-61 F ace Lay out of PH-SW12 (TSW) SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCT ION CONTRO LLED IMG TSW 00 0 Co llect s t he P[...]

  • Page 158

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 132 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . 6. E x te rn al I nter face See the NEAX2400 IPX Insta llation Manual[...]

  • Page 159

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 133 Revision 1.0 PH- SW12 Ti me Divisi on Switch 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB TSW MBR TONE ON ON 1 2 ON[...]

  • Page 160

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 134 Revision 1.0 PU- SW00/ PU-SW0 0-A Ti me Divisi on Switch PU-SW00/PU-S W00-A Time Divisio n Switch 1. General Fu nction The PU-SW00/PU-S W00-A circuit car d p rovid es the Ti m e di visi on Switch (TSW) and INT functi on for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG syste m. Each c ircuit card provi des swi tching for a Loc al Node ( LN) and fo[...]

  • Page 161

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 135 Revision 1.0 PU-SW00/ PU-SW00-A Ti me Divisi on Switch Fig ure 2- 63 Locat ion of PU-SW00/ PU-SW0 0-A (T SW) for IP X-U Sy ste m HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 LANI LANI LANI LANI HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 RES CPU CPU MISC IOC EMA RES RES RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT ISAGT MISC I/O BUS ISAGT BUS ISAG[...]

  • Page 162

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 136 Revision 1.0 PU- SW00/ PU-SW0 0-A Ti me Divisi on Switch Figure 2-63 L ocation of PU-SW00/PU-S W00-A ( TSW) for IPX -UM G System HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 LANI LANI LANI LANI HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 RES CPU CPU MMC MISC EMA RES RES RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT ISAGT ISAGT2 ISAGT2 MISC I/O BUS [...]

  • Page 163

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 137 Revision 1.0 PU-SW00/ PU-SW00-A Ti me Divisi on Switch 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots s hown b e low . 3. Fac e Layout of lamps, S witches, and Connector s The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 2-64 . Figu re 2-64 F ac e Layou[...]

  • Page 164

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 138 Revision 1.0 PU- SW00/ PU-SW0 0-A Ti me Divisi on Switch 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . LAM P NA ME COLOR ST A TE TSW A C T Green Light s whe n the TDSW bl ock is ac ti ve. Red Lights whe n the TDSW bl ock is in Mak e-b usy st ate. PWP ALM Red Lights whe[...]

  • Page 165

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 139 Revision 1.0 PU-SW00/ PU-SW00-A Ti me Divisi on Switch 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings f or t his cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the table belo w . 6. E x te rn al I nter face See the NEAX240 0 IPX Install ation Manual. 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S ETTI NG ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING TS W M B UP Circ uit c [...]

  • Page 166

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 140 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch PU-SW01 Highwa y Switch 1. General Fu nction The PU-SW01 circ uit card, which is used for t he IPX-U/IPX-UMG syste m, supports th e follo wing functio ns. (a) The switch composit ion is T -T -S-T (T : Time di vision, S: Space d i vision, T : T ime di vision) , and the space di vision[...]

  • Page 167

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 141 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch Figure 2-65 Locat i on of PU - SW01 ( HSW) fo r IPX -U System HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 LANI LANI LANI LANI HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 RES CPU CPU MISC IOC EMA RES RES RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT ISAGT MISC I/O BUS ISAGT BUS ISAGT BUS LPM TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O [...]

  • Page 168

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 142 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch Figure 2-65 Lo cation of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX -UM G System ISAGT2 ISAGT2 PCI MEM PCI BUS PCI BUS PCI MEM HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 LANI LANI LANI LANI HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 RES CPU CPU MMC MISC EMA RES RES RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT ISAGT MISC I/O BUS [...]

  • Page 169

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 143 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This circ uit card is mounte d i n ISWM l ocated in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots a re the sha ded parts show n be l ow . 3. Fac e Layout of lamps, S witches, and Connector s The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in Fi [...]

  • Page 170

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 144 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE HSW A CT Green Lights when the HSW b lock i s a cti ve. Red Light s whe n the HS W bloc k is in Ma ke-b usy sta te. PWP A LM Red Lights when the On- B oard P[...]

  • Page 171

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 145 Revision 1.0 PU- SW01 Highway Switch 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings on thi s cir cuit card are s hown in the tabl e belo w . 6. E x te rn al I nter face No cable connecti ons are re quired. 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet CKAL3 Green Light s whe n the clock sign al is se nt n orma lly fr om #03 circuit of T SW in I SWM. [...]

  • Page 172

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 146 Revision 1.0 PZ-G T13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway PZ-G T13 Indu strial S tand ard Ar ch itect ure Ga tewa y 1. General Fu nction The PZ-GT13 (IS AGT) circuit card contr ols the TS DW , DLKC , P LO e tc. u sing the PH-GT09 ( GT) in the TSWM . T his ca rd al s o provid e s the M IS C I/O bus i n terface , w [...]

  • Page 173

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 147 Revision 1.0 PZ -G T1 3 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (I SW) 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-GT13 is locat ed on the ISA bus which is alloca ted in the CPR as sho wn in Figur e 2-69 . Fi gur e 2- 69 Ex ter na l I nter f ace for PZ-GT 13 HSW0[...]

  • Page 174

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 148 Revision 1.0 PZ-G T13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layout o f connectors i s sh own in F igure 2- 70 . There are n o l amps or switc hes on t his ci rcui t car d. Figure 2-70 F ace Layout o f P Z- GT 1 3 (I SAG T) 4. E x te rn al I nter face This c ard h as no lamps. [...]

  • Page 175

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 149 Revision 1.0 PZ -G T1 6 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway PZ-G T16 Indu strial S tand ard Ar ch itect ure Ga tewa y 1. General Fu nction The P Z-GT1 6 (IS A GT) c ircuit card provide s bo th the I/O Lo cal bus an d th e MI SC bus inter f ace, wh ich permit s a microproc essor on t he CPR t o control the lo wer e[...]

  • Page 176

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 150 Revision 1.0 PZ-G T16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-GT16 (IS A GT) is loc ated on the ISA bu s, which is alloc ated in the C PR as sh own in Figure 2-72 . Fi gur e 2- 72 Ex ter na l I nter f ace for PZ-GT 16 PZ-GT16 (GT) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 [...]

  • Page 177

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 151 Revision 1.0 PZ -G T1 6 Industrial Standard Architecture Gat eway 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The fa ce layout of connectors is shown in Figur e 2-73 . There ar e no lamps or switche s on this circuit c ard. Figure 2-73 F ace Layout o f P Z- GT 1 6 (I SAG T) 4. Lamp Indica tions This c ard c ontains no lamps. 5. Swit[...]

  • Page 178

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 152 Revision 1.0 PZ-G T20 Industry St andard A rchitecture Gateway PZ-G T20 Indu stry St and ar d Ar ch ite ctu re Ga te wa y 1. General Fu nction The main f unction of the PZ-GT20 circ uit card is to connect th e Indust ry S tanda r d Arc hitect ure ( I SA) b us locate d on the CPU and the Local I/O b us, permitt ing the m[...]

  • Page 179

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 153 Revision 1.0 PZ -G T2 0 Indu stry Standard A rchitecture Gateway 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-GT20 resi des on the ISA b us th at is loc ated i n t he CPR as s ho wn in Fi gu r e 2 - 75 . Fi gur e 2- 75 Ex ter na l I nter f ace for PZ-GT 20 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layout of conne c to rs are s[...]

  • Page 180

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 154 Revision 1.0 PZ-G T20 Industry St andard A rchitecture Gateway 4. E x te rn al I nter face This c ard c ontains no lamps. 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. 6. E x te rn al I nter face See the NEAX240 0 IPX Install ation Manual. 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet No switch setti ngs a re re quired.[...]

  • Page 181

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 155 Revision 1.0 PZ -M5 6 5 Indu stry Standard A rchitecture Gateway PZ -M 565 Indu stry St and ar d Ar ch ite ctu re Ga te wa y 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ard has the r e l ay functio ns as menti oned belo w: (a) to re ceive the NMI (No n-Maskable Inte rruption) signal from t he PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) ca rd, then outp[...]

  • Page 182

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 156 Revision 1.0 PZ-M565 Industry St andard A rchitecture Gateway 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layo ut of conne ctors is sho wn bel o w. Figur e 2-7 9 Face La yout of PZ- M565 (ISAGT) Ca rd 4. Lamp Indica tions This c ard c ontains no lamps. 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. 6. E x te rn al [...]

  • Page 183

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 157 Revision 1.0 PZ-ME4 4 PCI Me mory PZ-ME44 PCI Mem or y 1. General Fu nction Mounted on CPU Boar d of CMP in IPX-UMG system, th is cir cuit card pr ovides the Memory Copy functio n related to A C T/ST -BY sy stem changeo v er . Figure 2-80 Locatio n of PZ- ME44 (PCI M EM) Card in the System 2. Mountin g Location/ Conditi[...]

  • Page 184

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 158 Revision 1.0 PZ-ME 44 PC I Me mory 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layo ut of conne ctors and lamps is shown in Figur e 2-82 . Figure 2-82 F ace Layout of P Z-ME44 (PCI ME M) Car d 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti n[...]

  • Page 185

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 159 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 1 9 Local Area Netwo rk Interface PZ-PC19 Loca l Area Netwo rk Int erface 1. General Fu nction The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circ uit card prov ides the interfa ce for the 10-B A SE-T and the Peri pheral Component Inter connect (P CI) Bus. The microproces sor on the CPR sends /re ce iv es the Fusion Link Data a[...]

  • Page 186

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 160 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 19 Local Area Ne twork Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-PC19 (L A NI) i s l ocated on the PCI bus in the CP R as sh own in F i gu r e 2 - 84 . Fi gur e 2- 84 Ex ter na l I nter f ace for PZ-P C 19 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes and Connec tors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switch[...]

  • Page 187

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 161 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 1 9 Local Area Netwo rk Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indica tions f or t his circui t card are sho wn in the table be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTIO N EST0 Green Laye r 1 link h as es tablished. EST 1 Green Dat a pac k et sen ding/r ece[...]

  • Page 188

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 162 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 19 Local Area Ne twork Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figu re 2-86 Cable Connec tio ns f or PZ -PC 19 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet No switch setti ngs a re requir ed. 24DTR CN2 FCH FCH PZ-PC19(LANI) HUB 10 BASE-T straight Cable 10 BASE-T straight Cable TO IMX MAT 10 BASE-T straight Cable HUB 10AL ([...]

  • Page 189

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 163 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 2 2 Local Area Netwo rk Interface PZ-PC22 Loca l Area Netwo rk Int erface 1. General Fu nction The PZ-PC22 (LANI) c ircuit car d is a single port Et her card that b uilds up Fusi on link or Ether LAN corr esponding to 10B ASE-T/ 100B ASE-TX. The card is mount ed on the Peri pheral Component Inter con[...]

  • Page 190

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 164 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 22 Local Area Ne twork Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-PC22 (L A NI) c ard i s ac commodated on t he P CI bu s in th e CPR as s hown in Figure 2 -88 . Figu re 2-88 Locatio n o f PZ- PC2 2 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho[...]

  • Page 191

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 165 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 2 2 Local Area Netwo rk Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION 100M Green 100MHz mode TXR X Gr een Dat a pac ket send i ng/r ec eiv[...]

  • Page 192

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 166 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 22 Local Area Ne twork Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figur e 2-90 External Interface fo r PZ-P C22 (LANI) 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet No switch setti ngs a re requir ed. PZ-PC22 (LANI) HUB 100 BASE-TX Straight Cable[...]

  • Page 193

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 167 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 2 3 Local Area Netwo rk Interface PZ-PC23 Loca l Area Netwo rk Int erface 1. General Fu nction The PZ-PC2 3 (LANI) c ircuit c ard is a multi ple por ts Ether c ard t hat build s up Fusion l ink or ex ternal Et her LAN corr espondin g to 10B ASE-T/100B ASE-TX. In t he IPX-UMG s ystem, one c onnector i[...]

  • Page 194

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 168 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 23 Local Area Ne twork Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PZ-PC23 (LANI) car d is a ccommodat e d on the PCI b us Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as sho wn in Figure 2- 92 . Figu re 2 -92 L o ca ti on for PZ-P C23 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a [...]

  • Page 195

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 169 Revision 1.0 PZ -PC 2 3 Local Area Netwo rk Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION 100M0/1 Green 100MHz mode LINK0/1 Green Link h as been e sta blished[...]

  • Page 196

    CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296 Page 170 Revision 1.0 PZ-PC 23 Local Area Ne twork Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figur e 2-94 External Interface fo r PZ-P C23 (LANI) 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet No switch setti ngs a re requir ed. 24DTR CN2 FCH FCH PZ-PC23(LANI) PZ-PC19(LANI) HUB Connected to the MAT 10 BASE-T Straight Cable HUB 10AL (10)FLT CA DTI HUB(PH-[...]

  • Page 197

    NDA-24296 Chapter 3 Page 171 Revision 1.0 CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD R EFERENCE 1. GEN ER AL This ch ap t er exp l ai n s the fol l o w ing item s a b out c ircu i t ca rd s. • General Fu nction Explai ns the ge neral func tion and p urpose for e ach control ci rcuit c ard. • Mountin g Location/ Condition Explai ns the mounting locati on[...]

  • Page 198

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 172 Revision 1.0 PA -CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk PA- CFTB 8-party Con fe ren ce T runk 1. General Fu nction The P A- CFTB (CFT) c ircuit card provi des an interfa c e for e sta bli shi n g a conferenc e, whic h is m ade up of a ma ximum of eight part ies. A maximum of se v en T ie Line s can pa rticipate in a confe rence [...]

  • Page 199

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 173 Revision 1.0 PA-CF TB 8-party Conference Trunk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any un ive rsa l slot as show n b e l ow. Note: Indi cates unive rsal slots for l ine/tru nk cir cuit car ds. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22[...]

  • Page 200

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 174 Revision 1.0 PA -CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 3-2 . Figu re 3-2 Face L ayo ut o f PA-CFTB (CFT) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit[...]

  • Page 201

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 175 Revision 1.0 PA-CF TB 8-party Conference Trunk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . SW ITC H NAME SW ITC H NO . SETTIN G ST AND ARD SETTIN G MEAN ING MB UP Circ uit card make busy DO W N × Circuit card make bus y cancel SW0 1 ON × Fi xed in the sy[...]

  • Page 202

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 176 Revision 1.0 PA -CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk SW 1 1 ON × Fi xed in the sy stem OF F 2 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 3 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 4 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 5 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 6 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 7 ON × Fi xed in the syst em OF F 8 ON OF F × Fixe d in t[...]

  • Page 203

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 177 Revision 1.0 PA-CF TB 8-party Conference Trunk 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet SW2 7 ON CFTB Insertion L oss (P AD v alue) Setting OF F 8 ON OF F MODUL E SL O T NO. SWITCH NAME SWITC H SHAP E REMARKS PIM SW0 SW1 SW2 MB DOWN Circ uit c ard make busy ca ncel SW ITC H NAME SW ITC H NO . SETTIN G ST AND ARD SETTIN G MEAN ING SW2-7[...]

  • Page 204

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 178 Revision 1.0 PA- CK14 Oscillator PA-CK14 Oscillat or 1. General Fu nction The PLO bloc k of the TS W car d generate s its ba se clock signals, a nd adjust s their pha se with the source clock signa ls so the PLO can send the synchron ized c lock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is a cloc k-subordina te-offic e [...]

  • Page 205

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 179 Revision 1.0 PA -CK 14 O scilla tor 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-CK14 (OSC) is locat ed in Port Int erface Module number zero (PI M 0). The card mounted in slot number 09 works as the p rimary OSC, 17 for the second ary OSC. Note: This c ar d occupies two s lots. 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne[...]

  • Page 206

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 180 Revision 1.0 PA- CK14 Oscillator 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown i n th e table belo w . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are shown in the table below. 6. Ext erna l In terf a ce Since the base clock signals are delivere d through the pr[...]

  • Page 207

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 181 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK16 Pha se Loc k Oscilla tor 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit c ard, used togethe r with a direct digit a l inte rface circuit c ard, sets u p network synchroni zation with t he network. With this circuit car d, the 4 IMG system c an be a c lock subordinate of fice of t[...]

  • Page 208

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 182 Revision 1.0 PH- CK16 Phase L ock Osc illato r The sour ce c lock of the clock subordina t e offi ce i s either the digi t al clock supply (DCS) or the digi ta l inter face clock (DIU0 - DIU3). W hen cloc k sou rce failure has occurr ed, the PLO chooses another cloc k source automat ically in the orde r of : 1. DCS 2. D[...]

  • Page 209

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 183 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator The MUSIC ROM locat ed on this circuit card also contai ns the hold tone, and is suppl ied t o t he TSW circ uit card . W he n an ex terna l m us ic on hold i s app lied to the 4 I MG sys tem , th is c ircu it card pr ovides the i nterfa ce f or the exte rnal hold tone source[...]

  • Page 210

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 184 Revision 1.0 PH- CK16 Phase L ock Osc illato r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the TSWM of t he slo t shown b elow. 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne ctors The face layout of l amps, swi tc hes, a nd connect ors is shown in Figure 3- 7 . Figure 3 -7 F ace Lay out of PH-CK16[...]

  • Page 211

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 185 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown i n th e table belo w . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE AC T G ree n R em ai ns lit w hile t h is cir cui t car d is i n active st at e. Of f Remains of f while thi s c ircuit card is in st and-by state . M[...]

  • Page 212

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 186 Revision 1.0 PH- CK16 Phase L ock Osc illato r 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SWITCH NAM E SE T TI NG ST AN D ARD SETT ING MEANING MB UP Ci rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y . DO W N × C i rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y ca n ce l . SW03 1 - F 1 Fixe[...]

  • Page 213

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 187 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator SW02 1 ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply rout e zero. OFF D IU 0 is not used. 2 ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply rout e one . OFF D IU 1 is not used. 3 ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply rout e two . OFF D IU 2 is not used. 4 ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI c[...]

  • Page 214

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 188 Revision 1.0 PH- CK16 Phase L ock Osc illato r SW AB 1 Note: Don ’ t car e. 2 3 4 ON Not us ed. OFF × No t u s ed. 5 MU SI C CH 1 select i on. T he ki nd o f m us ic varies de pe nd ing on th e melo dy IC lo ca te d on this circuit card. 6 7 8 ON Not us ed. OFF × No t u s ed. SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND[...]

  • Page 215

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 189 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator 6. E x te rn al I nter face When this ci rcuit ca rd is lo cate d in the T SW M, connect 3 4PH E XCL K CA- A to th e EXC LK0 / EX CL K1 connec tors on the backp lane of t he TSWM. Fi gu re 3- 8 LT Co n ne ct or Le a d Lo c at i o n of PL O (TS W M ) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08[...]

  • Page 216

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 190 Revision 1.0 PH- CK16 Phase L ock Osc illato r Fig ure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 DCSA1 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 DCSA0 POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A CCT /DTI /PRT CCT /DTI /PRT CCT /DTI /PRT CCT[...]

  • Page 217

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 191 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 16 Phase Lock Oscillator 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S W ITCH SHAPE REM ARKS MB SW 01 SW 02 SW 03 SW A C SW8F SW AB ON 1 234 ON 5 6 7 8 123 4 ON 567 8 1 2 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 234 ON 5 6 7 8[...]

  • Page 218

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 192 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r PH-CK16-A Pha se Loc k Oscilla tor 1. General Fu nction This c ircu it c ard, u sed w ith a dir ect di gital i nterf ace circui t car d, set s up netw ork syn chron izati on. W ith this circ uit ca rd, t he system can be a clock subor dinat e offic e of the di gital networ[...]

  • Page 219

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 193 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Fi gur e 3- 11 Loc ation of PH-CK1 6-A (PLO) in IPX-U /IPX-UMG Syste m LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3) LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT CLK1 (TSWM1) TSW 10~13 CLK0 (TSWM1) TSW 00~03 MUX ( System1 ) MUX ( System0 ) LC/TRK HSW00 ISWM HSW01 CLK1 ([...]

  • Page 220

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 194 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <Fo r 4-IM G S ystem > <For I PX-U /IPX-UMG Syste m> 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TSWM(IMG1) Mounting Module PL O ( #[...]

  • Page 221

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 195 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layout of l amps, swi tc hes, a nd connect ors are shown in Figure 3-12 . Figure 3-12 Face L ay out of PH-CK1 6-A ( PLO) 1 2 3 4 1 2 SW11 SW10 SW12 MB OPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MJ MN SYNC ICK CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM SW01 S[...]

  • Page 222

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 196 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown i n th e table belo w : Note: This lamp i s ef fe ctive when th is car d is mount ed in T SWM0 of the I PX-U/IPX-UMG s ystem. When t his car d is mounted in I SWM, this la mp is not us ed. 5. Switch S[...]

  • Page 223

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 197 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator The key setti ng of “ SW01 ” diff ers de pending on the mount ing location. [Mounte d in ISWM of IPX- U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-I MG Syste m] Note: When t his car d is us ed in t he 4- IMG or ISWM of the I PX-U/IPX-UMG sys tem, s pecify the cloc k sour ce (DCS or DTI)[...]

  • Page 224

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 198 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r [Mounte d in TS WM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System] SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW01 1 ON × Clock su bordinat e of fi ce. (Fix ed) OF F Cl ock s our c e office . 2 ON Digital C lock Supply rou te zero (DCS 0) is used. (In ca se t his ci rcu it c[...]

  • Page 225

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 199 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Note 2: When this car d is mounted in TSWM0 o f the IPX-U syste m , the DCS clock fr o m the ISWM i s used . The DTI cloc k can also be used as an alternate clock s upply route in case of DCS cloc k fa il ure. Note 3: When this car d is moun ted in ISWM, set to “ ON ( =CLK [...]

  • Page 226

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 200 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r SWITCH NAME SW IT C H NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW1 1 1 2 3 4 SW1 2 1 2 3 4 ON Not used. OFF × Not u sed. 5 MUSIC (C H1) select ion. The m usic vari es dep ending on th e m elo dy IC loc ated on thi s circuit car d. 6 7 8 ON Not used. OFF × Not u sed. SW11[...]

  • Page 227

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 201 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 6. E x te rn al I nter face PLO l eads appear on th e LT conne ctors la beled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. • PLO mounti ng slots The PLO card i s mounted in Slots 21 and 2 3 of TSWM. • L T cab le conne ctors Connect the L T cables to the connect or s la b e l ed E X C L K 0 a nd E [...]

  • Page 228

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 202 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 c onnector P in Assignment Pins ar e assigne d as follo ws on the EXCLK0/EXCL K 1 connectors. When the clock is di strib ut ed from a digit al i n te rfac e , u se one pair of DI U xxx i n o n e of th e f our i nput s . (T h er e ar e a ma x i mum o f fou[...]

  • Page 229

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 203 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator • L T cab le conne ctors Connect L T cables to the co nnectors labe led EXCLK0 a nd EXCLK1 on the I S WM backp lane . Fig ure 3- 14 PL O Pin Ass ign ment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 c onnector P in Assignment Pins ar e assigne d as follo ws on the EXC[...]

  • Page 230

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 204 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r • Cable Connecti on Diagra m Provi de the foll owing wiring at the MDF . The connect ion di agram in Figure 3-15 sho ws an e xa mple of a syste m with the PLO ca rds i n dual con figuratio n. Figu re 3-15 Ca ble Connection Diagram (ISWM) fo r Acceptin g S ync hro nizat i[...]

  • Page 231

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 205 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-16 show s an e xam ple of di stribu ting c loc k from a di gital i nt erface in LN /L MG . Th is exa mple a ssum es that the Digit a l Tr unk POUT leads are used as the fi rst clo ck di stri b ut ion rou te. Figure 3 -16 Cable Con nect io n Diagram ( I SWM) fo r Rece[...]

  • Page 232

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 206 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r Figure 3-17 LT C onnecto r L ead Loca tion of P LO (ISWM- TSWM0/1) 26 1 LEAD NAME LEAD NAME 27 2 28 3 PIN No. PIN No. 29 4 30 5 FM1 FM0 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 36 10 11 E DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 3A DIU 2A E DIU 1B DIU 1A DIU 0B DIU 0A CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Slot No.12) TSWM1 T[...]

  • Page 233

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 207 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-18 sho ws an e x ample of dist ri buting cl ock f rom a digi tal interf ace. T his figure assum es that th e Di gital Trunk POUT le ads are use d as the first cl ock d istribu tion route. (This c onnection is not requir ed for IPX-UMG syste m.) Fig ure 3-18 Cable Con[...]

  • Page 234

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 208 Revision 1.0 PH-CK16-A Phase L ock Osc illato r Figure 3 -19 C onnection of Extern al Music-On -Hold 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SW ITCH SHAPE MB SW 01 SW 02 SW 03 SW 10 SW 11 SW 12 ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 LEAD NAME FM1 FM0 LEAD NAME E E PIN No.[...]

  • Page 235

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 209 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK17 Pha se Loc k Oscilla tor 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit c ard, used togethe r with a direct digit a l inte rface circuit c ard, sets u p network synchroni zation with the ne twork. Since t his circ uit card provides a high precisi on base clock osci llat or, th e [...]

  • Page 236

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 210 Revision 1.0 PH- CK17 Phase L ock Osc illato r The sour ce c lock of the clock subordina t e offi ce i s either the digi t al clock supply (DCS) or the digi ta l inter face clock (DIU0 - DIU3). W hen cloc k sou rce failure has occurr ed, the PLO chooses another cloc k source automat ically in the orde r of : 1. DCS 2. D[...]

  • Page 237

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 211 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator The MUSIC ROM also loc ated on this circ uit card contains the hold tone, and is suppl ied to the TS W c ircuit card . W he n an ex terna l m us ic on hold i s app lied to the 4 I MG sys tem , th is c ircu it card pr ovides the i nterfa ce f or the exte rnal hold tone source.[...]

  • Page 238

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 212 Revision 1.0 PH- CK17 Phase L ock Osc illato r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard is mounted in the TSWM of t he slo t shown b elow. 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne ctors The face layout of l amps, swi tc hes, a nd connect ors is shown in Figure 3- 22 . Fi gur e 3 -2 2 Face Layou t of PH [...]

  • Page 239

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 213 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown i n th e table belo w . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE AC T G ree n R em ai ns lit w hile t h is cir cui t car d is i n active st at e. Of f Remains of f while thi s c ircuit card is in st and-by state . M[...]

  • Page 240

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 214 Revision 1.0 PH- CK17 Phase L ock Osc illato r 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAM E SE T TI NG ST AN D ARD SETT ING MEANING MB UP Ci rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y . DO W N × C i rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y ca n ce l . SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed[...]

  • Page 241

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 215 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator SW 02 1 ON DIU 0 is use d as t he DT I clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is no t used. 2 ON DIU 1 is use d as t he DT I clock su pply rou te on e. OFF DIU 1 is no t used. 3 ON DIU 2 is use d as t he DT I clock su pply rou te t wo. OFF DIU 2 is no t used. 4 ON DIU 3 is used a[...]

  • Page 242

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 216 Revision 1.0 PH- CK17 Phase L ock Osc illato r SW 04 1 Note: Don ’ t car e . 2 3 4 ON Not us ed. OFF × Not us ed. 5 MUSIC C H1 se lecti on. Th e kind of mus ic vari es depe nding on the melod y IC located on this ci rcui t car d. 6 7 8 ON Not us ed. OFF × Not us ed. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST AN D ARD SETT[...]

  • Page 243

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 217 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator 5. E x te rn al I nter face When this ci rcuit ca rd is lo cate d in the T SW M, connect 3 4PH E XCL K CA- A to th e EXC LK0 / EX CL K1 connec tors on the backp lane of t he TSWM. Figu re 3-23 LT Conn ector Lead Lo c a tio n of PL O (TSWM) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 [...]

  • Page 244

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 218 Revision 1.0 PH- CK17 Phase L ock Osc illato r Figu re 3-24 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 DCSA1 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 DCSA0 POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A POUT B POUT A CCT /DTI /PRT CCT /DTI /PRT CCT /DTI /PR[...]

  • Page 245

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 219 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 17 Phase Lock Oscillator 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S W ITCH SHAPE REM ARKS MB SW 01 SW 02 SW 03 SW 05 SW 06 SW 04 ON 123 4 ON 567 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8[...]

  • Page 246

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 220 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r PH-CK17-A Pha se Loc k Oscilla tor 1. General Fu nction This circ uit c ard used with a dir ect digital int er face circ uit card, se t s up ne t work synchronizati on bet ween networks. Sinc e thi s circuit ca rd provides a hig h precis ion ba se clo ck oscill ator, the s[...]

  • Page 247

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 221 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator Fi gur e 3- 26 Loc ation of PH-CK1 7-A (PLO) in IPX-U /IPX-UMG Syste m LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3) LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT CLK1 (TSWM1) TSW 10~13 CLK0 (TSWM1) TSW 00~03 MUX ( System1 ) MUX ( System0 ) LC/TRK HSW00 ISWM HSW01 CLK1 ([...]

  • Page 248

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 222 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <Fo r 4-IM G S ystem > <For I PX-U /IPX-UMG Syste m> TSWM0(IMG1) Mounting Module 00 01 02 03[...]

  • Page 249

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 223 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layout of l amps, swi tc hes, a nd connect ors are shown in Figure 3-27 : Figure 3-27 Face L ay out of PH-CK1 7-A ( PLO) 1 2 3 4 1 2 SW11 SW10 SW12 MB OPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW01 SW02 SW03 12345678 12345678 MJ MN SYN[...]

  • Page 250

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 224 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown i n th e table belo w : Note: This lamp i s ef fe ctive when th is car d is mount ed in T SWM0 of the I PX-U/IPX-UMG s ystem. When t his car d is mounted in I SWM, this la mp is not us ed. LAMP NAME C[...]

  • Page 251

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 225 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAM E SE T TI NG ST AN D ARD SETT ING MEANING MB UP Ci rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y . DO W N × C i rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y ca n ce l . SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed t[...]

  • Page 252

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 226 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r The key setti ng of “ SW01 ” diff ers de pending on the mount ing location. [Mounte d in ISWM of IPX- U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-I MG Syste m] Note 1: When this c ar d is used in the 4-IMG or I SWM of IPX-U/I PX-UMG syst em, spec ify the clo ck sou rce (DCS or DT I)[...]

  • Page 253

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 227 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator [Mounte d in TS WM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System] SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW01 1 ON × Clock su bordinat e of fi ce. (Fix ed) OF F Cl ock s our c e office . 2 ON Digital C lock Supply rou te zero (DCS 0) is used. (In ca se t his ci rcu it card[...]

  • Page 254

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 228 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r Note 1: When this c ar d i s mounted i n TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG sy stem, DCS clock fr om the ISWM is used. The DTI clo ck can als o b e used as a n a l ternat e clo ck s upply r oute in c ase o f DCS cl ock fa i l ure. Note 2: When this car d is moun ted in ISWM, set t[...]

  • Page 255

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 229 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SW IT C H NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW1 1 1 2 3 4 SW1 2 1 2 3 4 ON Not used. OFF × Not u sed. 5 MUSIC (C H1) select ion. The m usic vari es dep ending on th e m elo dy IC loc ated on thi s circuit car d. 6 7 8 ON Not used. OFF × Not u sed. SW11 -1[...]

  • Page 256

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 230 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 6. E x te rn al I nter face PLO i nput leads appe ar o n t he L T con n ecto r s labele d E XC L K 0 an d E X C L K 1 • PLO mounti ng slots The PLO card i s mounted in Slots 21 and 2 3 of TSWM. • L T cab le conne ctors Connect the L T cables to the connect or s la b e [...]

  • Page 257

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 231 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 c onnector P in Assignment Pins ar e assigne d as follo ws on the EXCLK0/EXCL K 1 connectors. When the clock is di strib ut ed from a digit al i n te rfac e , u se one pair of DI U xxx i n o n e of th e f our i nput s . (T h er e ar e a ma x i mum o f fou r [...]

  • Page 258

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 232 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r • L T cab le conne ctors Connect L T cables to the co nnectors labe led EXCLK0 a nd EXCLK1 on the I S WM backp lane . Fig ure 3- 29 PL O Pin Ass ign ment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 c onnector P in Assignment Pins ar e assigne d as follo ws on the [...]

  • Page 259

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 233 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator • Cable Connecti on Diagra m Provi de the foll owing wiring at the MDF . The connect ion di agram in Figure 3-30 sho ws an e xa mple of a system that h a s t h e P L O c ards i n dual con fi gura tion. Figu re 3-30 Ca ble Connection Diagram (ISWM) fo r Acceptin g S ync hro [...]

  • Page 260

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 234 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r Figure 3-31 show s an e xam ple of di stribu ting c loc k from a di gital i nt erface in LN /L MG . Th is exa mple a ssum es that the Digit a l Tr unk POUT leads are used as the fi rst clo ck di stri b ut ion rou te. Figure 3 -31 Cable Con nect io n Diagram ( I SWM) fo r R[...]

  • Page 261

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 235 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-32 LT C onnecto r L ead Loca tion of P LO (ISWM- TSWM0/1) CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Slot No.12) TSWM1 TSWM0 ISWM Installation Cable DIU Connection Note MDF To Digital Interface EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PL[...]

  • Page 262

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 236 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r Figure 3-33 sho ws an e x ample of dist ri buting cl ock f rom a digi tal interf ace. T his figure assum es that th e Di gital Trunk POUT le ads are use d as the first cl ock d istribu tion route. (This c onnection is not requir ed for IPX-UMG syste m.) Fig ure 3-33 Cable [...]

  • Page 263

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 237 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3 -34 C onnection of Extern al Music-On -Hold ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 LEAD NAME FM1 FM0 LEAD NAME E E PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MUSIC SOURCE MDF ISW-LN PLO CA-A / 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation C[...]

  • Page 264

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 238 Revision 1.0 PH-CK17-A Phase L ock Osc illato r 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SW ITCH SHAPE MB SW 01 SW 02 SW 03 SW 10 SW 11 SW 12 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 ON 1 ON 2 3 4 123 4 ON 567 8[...]

  • Page 265

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 239 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 18 Clock PH-CK18 Cloc k 1. General Fu nction This ci rcui t card is us ed for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system o r used for the Local M odule Gr oup (LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main functio n of this circui t ca rd is to sup ply bas ic clock s ignals t o the syste m. This card r eceives c[...]

  • Page 266

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 240 Revision 1.0 PH- CK18 Clock 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition Mountin g locatio ns for this cir cuit card a re shown below. 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne ctors The fac e layout of each lamp and switc h on this ci rcuit c ard is shown i n th e figure below: Figure 3-36 Face L ay out of PH-CK1 8 (CLK) 00 01[...]

  • Page 267

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 241 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 18 Clock 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are shown b elow: 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings f or t his cir cuit ca rd ar e shown below. LAMP COLOR MEANING OPE Gree n Li ghts when this cir cui t card is i n A CT st at e. ALM 0 Red Li ghts when clock signal fail ure h[...]

  • Page 268

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 242 Revision 1.0 PH- CK18 Clock 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figure 3-37 LT C onnec tor L ead Location (IS WM-TS WM0/1) CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Sl ot N o.12 ) TSW M1 TSW M0 ISWM Installation C able DIU Connect ion N ote MDF To Digital Interface and/or DCS EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO [...]

  • Page 269

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 243 Revision 1.0 PH -CK 18 Clock 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SW ITCH NA M E SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB ON[...]

  • Page 270

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 244 Revision 1.0 PA- 8COTBJ Central Office Trunk PA-8COTBJ Centr al Office T runk 1. General Fu nction The PA -8COT BJ (8COT ) circui t car d pro vides a n interf ace b etw een a max imum o f 8C.O . lin es and th e syste m . And this card al so provide s the caller ID servi c e. Depending upon keys sett ing of this card, th[...]

  • Page 271

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 245 Revision 1.0 PA-8C OTBJ Central Office T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face la yout of l a mps, switc hes, and c onnectors of this circuit car d is shown in F igu re 3-39 . Figur e 3-3 9 Face La yout of PA-8CO TBJ (8COT) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons of thi s c[...]

  • Page 272

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 246 Revision 1.0 PA- 8COTBJ Central Office Trunk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SWITC H SWITCH NO . SETTING ST A ND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW0 0 (MB) UP Circuit card make b usy DOWN × Ci rcuit ca rd make bus y cance l SW0 1 (MB0-7) ON Reque st for m [...]

  • Page 273

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 247 Revision 1.0 PA-8C OTBJ Central Office T runk 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figure 3-40 L T Con necto r Leads Ac com modation PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 [...]

  • Page 274

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 248 Revision 1.0 PA- 8COTBJ Central Office Trunk Figu re 3-41 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m Tabl e 3-1 Balancing Ne t work and Te rmina l Im pedance Balancing Ne twork T ermi nal I mpedance EIA / TIA 46 4 - A 900 Ω CCITT Q. 517 A T &T Echo T est Network Note: As ill ustrat ed ab ove, two ci rcuits (#0, #1) a r e r equi[...]

  • Page 275

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 249 Revision 1.0 PA-8C OTBJ Central Office T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLOT NO . SW ITC H NAM E SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 (M B ) UP: Circui t card make b usy . DOW N : C i r cu it c ar d m a ke bus y can cel. SW01 (MB0-7) Ma ke Bu sy sw it ches a ssociat ed with No. 0 t hrough No. 7 Circui ts. ON: M ake b usy[...]

  • Page 276

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 250 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk PA-16COTBE Centr al Office T runk 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ard is accommodate d in th e PIM and s upports the fol lo wing int erfac e. (a) Interfa ce with 16 C .O. lines (b) Interf ace wit h 1 4 C.O. line s and 1 Paging Equip ment line. Figure 3-42 L o cation of [...]

  • Page 277

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 251 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a re sho wn bel o w. 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicates univer sal slots for line/trun k ci rcuit cards . PIM Mounting Module[...]

  • Page 278

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 252 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors of t his circuit c ard is sh own i n Figure 3-43 . Figure 3-43 Face Lay out of PA-1 6 C OTB E (16COT) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s[...]

  • Page 279

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 253 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW00 (MB) UP Circui t card make b usy DOWN × Circ uit ca rd make bu sy cancel SW01 (MB0 ~ [...]

  • Page 280

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 254 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW02 ( MB8 ~ 15) 0 ON No. 8 Cir cuit make b usy OFF × No. 8 Cir cuit make b usy canc el 1 ON No. 9 Cir cuit make b usy OFF × No. 9 Cir cuit make b usy canc el 2 ON No. 10 Circui t make bus y OFF × No. 10 Circ[...]

  • Page 281

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 255 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk Note: Switc h N o.5-8 is onl y avail able when SP-3331 i s used for E911 service. If SP- 3003 is used, these sw i tches ar e f ixed to off . SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW 0 (SW10) 1 - 4 T erminal Impeda nce 5, 6 W ink S igna l Detect ion[...]

  • Page 282

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 256 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW 1 (SW11) 1 ON × Fixed OFF 2 ON OFF × Fixed 3 ON (Call a bandon d etec ting c onditi on - Di sconnec tion i f ringing signal does not arri ve long er than three s ec onds .) OFF × Fix ed (Call a bandon d et[...]

  • Page 283

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 257 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk P AD Setting ARTD AP AD TRANSMIT (D-A) P AD RECEIVE (A-D) P AD RE MARKS 7 15 0dB 0dB 2 2 3dB 3dB 3 3 6dB 6dB 4 4 0dB -5dB (Gain)[...]

  • Page 284

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 258 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing ro ute diagram a re s hown i n Figure 3-44 . Figure 3 -44 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 [...]

  • Page 285

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 259 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk Figure 3 -44 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 [...]

  • Page 286

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 260 Revision 1.0 PA- 16COTBE Central Office Trunk Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) NEAX2400 I PX A0 MDF C.O. Li ne A B B0 CO T Connect ion wi th C.O . Line NEAX2400 IPX A0 MDF A B B0 COT Connect ion wit h Paging Equipment Paging Equi pment (MR ) B0 B1 G G -48V FUSE G Dist[...]

  • Page 287

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 261 Revision 1.0 PA-16CO TBE Central Office T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLOT NO . SWITCH N AME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 ( MB) UP : Circ uit c ard m ake b usy DO W N: Circ uit c ard make b usy can cel SW01 (MB0-7) Ma k e B usy Swi tc hes as soci ated with No. 0 th rough No. 7 Ci rcuits. ON : Mak e b us y on [...]

  • Page 288

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 262 Revision 1.0 PA- CS02- C Attendant Interface PA-CS02- C At tendant In terfac e 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit card is an atten dant cons ole (A TT CO N) in terface card whi ch suppo rts the in terface func tion for acc ommodating A TTCON (maximum two sets of A TTC ON per card ), PM function (contr oll ing of A T- TC[...]

  • Page 289

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 263 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 2-C Attendan t I nterface 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 3-47 . Figure 3-47 Face Layou t o f PA-CS02-C (2ATI) OPE N-OPE MB BLS1 BLS0 SW7 SW8 BLA1 BLA0 SW6 SW2 SW3 3 2 1 0[...]

  • Page 290

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 264 Revision 1.0 PA- CS02- C Attendant Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . Tab le 3 -2 ATI C ard L a m p I nd icat ion LAMP COL[...]

  • Page 291

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 265 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 2-C Attendan t I nterface SWITC H SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST A ND ARD SE TTING ME ANING SW6 (T AS1) SW7 (T AS0) 1 2 3 4 SW8 0 ON No . 0 c i r c ui t m a ke - bus y req u e st OFF × Normal se tti ng 1 ON No . 1 c i r c ui t m a ke - bus y req u e st OFF × Normal se tti ng 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not[...]

  • Page 292

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 266 Revision 1.0 PA- CS02- C Attendant Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of th e LT con nector leads of this ci rcuit card i s as shown i n Figur e 3-48 . Figu re 3- 48 LT Co nnector Lead Ac c omm odati on 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 LT[...]

  • Page 293

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 267 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 2-C Attendan t I nterface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODUL E SLO T N O . SWI TCH NAME S WITCH S HAPE R EMARKS PIM 12, 23 SW2 SW3 SW6 SW7 SW8 123 4 123 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON OFF No. 3 No . 2 No. 1 No . 0[...]

  • Page 294

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 268 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface PA-CS08 Ho tel Atten dant In terfa ce 1. General Fu nction This c ircui t card i s the Hote l Atte ndant C onsole (Hote l A TTCON) inter face c ard that supports the inte rfa ce functio n for the Hotel A TTC ON (m a ximum two s ets of Hote l A TTCON per ca r d ), PM functi[...]

  • Page 295

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 269 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8 Hotel Attendan t Interface 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 3-50 . Figure 3-50 Face La yout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card OPE N-OPE MB FU0 ( No te ) SW11 BL S1 BL A1 BL A0 SW 04 SW03 SW02[...]

  • Page 296

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 270 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . LAM P CO LO R ST A TE OP E G re en R e ma in s li t w h il e th is cir c uit ca r d i s o per a tin g . N- OP E Re d R e m a ins lit wh il e thi s c ir c ui t c ar d i s i n M[...]

  • Page 297

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 271 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8 Hotel Attendan t Interface 5. Switch Setti ngs Stand ar d s et ting s f or various s w itche s o n t h i s cir cuit card ar e s hown in t he ta bl e b elo w. SW IT CH S WITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP Circuit card Mak e-bu sy . DOWN Cir c u it c ar d M a ke - bus y ca n ce l. S[...]

  • Page 298

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 272 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface Note: When the PB signal is sent fr om the Hotel A TT , se t the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and a ssign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I. SW IT CH S WITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW11 1 ON OFF × Fixed 2 ON OFF × Fixed 3 ON OFF × Fixed 4 ON OFF × Fixed SW12 1 ON × [...]

  • Page 299

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 273 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8 Hotel Attendan t Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face The loc ation for the L T connec tor l eads for thi s cir cuit card is sh own in F igur e 3-51 . Figure 3-51 L T Connecto r Lead L ocation (P IM) PIM PIM Mounting Module 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT[...]

  • Page 300

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 274 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB UP: Circuit car d Make -b usy . DO WN: Circui t card M ak e-busy canc el. SW02 SW03 SW04 SW07 SW08 SW09 SW9-2, SW9- 3: Not used SW11 SW12 ON 12 34 12 34 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON No . 3 No . 2 No . 1 No . 0 ON [...]

  • Page 301

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 275 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8-B Hotel Attendan t Interface PA-CS08- B Ho tel Atten dant In terfa ce 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit car d is Hotel atte ndant consol e (Hote l A TTCO N) int erfa ce ca rd which suppor ts the interf ace functio n f or accommodatin g Hotel A TTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel A TTC ON per card) , [...]

  • Page 302

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 276 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08- B Hotel Attendant Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-CS08-B (HMA TI) card can be mounted in the fol lowing shaded slots as sh own be l ow. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0 8 09 10 11 1 2 13 14 15 1 6 17 18 1 9 20 21 22 23 HMA T I HMA T I[...]

  • Page 303

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 277 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8-B Hotel Attendan t Interface 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown be lo w. Figure 3-53 Face Lay out of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) OPE N-OPE MB FU0 (Note) SW11 BL S1 BL A1 BL A0 SW 04 SW03 SW02 SW08 SW07 S[...]

  • Page 304

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 278 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08- B Hotel Attendant Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . LAM P CO LOR STAT E OP E G re en Re m ain s li t wh il e th i s c irc ui t c ard i s o p era ti ng N- O PE Re d R e m a in s li t w h il e thi s c ir c ui [...]

  • Page 305

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 279 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8-B Hotel Attendan t Interface 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SW IT CH S WITCH NO. SE TTING STANDARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP Circuit card mak e b usy DOWN Circui t car d m ake busy ca n cel SW02 (T AS0) SW03 (T AS1[...]

  • Page 306

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 280 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08- B Hotel Attendant Interface Note: When PB signal is sen t from the Hotel A TT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 O N, and assign A HSY comm and, I ND EX 114, b7 = I. SW IT CH S WITCH NO. SE TTING STANDARD SETTI NG MEANING SW11 1 ON OFF × Fixed 2 ON OFF × Fixed 3 ON OFF × Fixed 4 ON OFF × Fixed SW12 1 ON × F[...]

  • Page 307

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 281 Revision 1.0 PA-CS0 8-B Hotel Attendan t Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of th e LT con nector leads of this ci rcuit card i s as shown i n Figur e 3-54 . Figu re 3- 54 LT Co nnector Lead Ac c omm odati on 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 L[...]

  • Page 308

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 282 Revision 1.0 PA- CS08- B Hotel Attendant Interface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB UP: Circuit c ard mak e busy DO W N : C irc u i t ca r d ma k e busy ca nc el SW02 SW03 SW04 SW07 SW08 SW09 SW9-2, SW9- 3: Not used SW11 SW12 ON 12 34 12 34 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON No . 3 No . 2 No . 1 No [...]

  • Page 309

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 283 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface PA-CS33 At tendant In terfac e 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit card is a Desk Console in terf ace which suppor ts the inter face fun ction fo r accommodatin g two sets of Desk Console s, PB/DP sen der funct ion and T r unk Answer from a ny S tation (T AS) func tion. Figure [...]

  • Page 310

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 284 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-CS33 (A TI ) can be mounted in ei ther Slot 12 or 23 of th e PI M. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches and conne ctors i s s hown in Figur e 3 -56 . Figur e 3-5 6 Face La yout of PA-[...]

  • Page 311

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 285 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ng Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE OPE Green Remains lit wh ile cir cuit ca r[...]

  • Page 312

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 286 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface SW10 (T AS#0) SW13 (T AS#1) 1 SW10 and S W13 desi gnate th e cur rent limit resist ance for TAS#0 an d TAS#1 re spect ivel y. 2 3 4 T his switch designat e s t he T AS si gnaling s ystem in co njunction wi th SW 11/12 a nd SW14/15. SW11/ SW12 (T AS#0) SW14/ SW15 (T AS#1) SW11/ 1[...]

  • Page 313

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 287 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface Note: DESK CONSOLE starts up i n Day or N ight mode a ccor ding to this se tting af ter the cir cuit car d initia lization, r e gar dless of the mode befo re the initial i zation. SWITCH NAM E SW IT C H NO SETTI NG S T AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW16 1 F or Busine ss syste m, se[...]

  • Page 314

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 288 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face Locat i o n of the LT connecto r leads for t he D ES K CONSOLE in terface i s as s hown i n Figure 3-57 . Figure 3-57 L T Connecto r Lead L ocation (P IM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [...]

  • Page 315

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 289 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface Figu re 3-58 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m Note: The power feeding wir es (BN4820/BN4821/ BN4830/BN48 31/GND) are not r equir ed when the power is supplie d to the DESK CONSOLE loc al l y . AT I B2 BN4820 BN4821 B3 BN 4830 BN 4831 B3 BN 4830 B N48 31 GND GND B2 B N48 20 B N48 2[...]

  • Page 316

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 290 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Des k Consol e. Fig ure 3-59 Desk Console Connection Power s upply and the maximum di sta nce bet ween the ATI a nd Desk Consol e. The maximum distance bet ween the ATI c ircuit car d and Desk Console is as s hown belo w. Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65[...]

  • Page 317

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 291 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface If th e d i sta nc e exc e eds the ab ove, est im ate it according to the calculatio n af ter F i gur e 3 - 60 . Fig ure 3-60 D istan ce be twe e n PBX an d Modular Ros ette o f De s k Cons ole A B BN4830 BN4831 GND GND A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 A2 B2 BN4820 BN4821 A B BN4820 BN4821[...]

  • Page 318

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 292 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface Calculat ion of the distance between t he A TI ci rcui t card and Modular Ros ette The dista nc e M in the figur e above is determine d according t o the Direc t-Current resist ance of power supply cables (-48V and GN D). Note th at the maximum res istance is 26 Ω as sho wn in[...]

  • Page 319

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 293 Revision 1.0 PA-CS3 3 Attendan t I nterface The l oca tion of the LT connec tor lead s fo r the TA S inter f ace is a s s how n in Figure 3-6 1 . Figure 3-61 L T Connecto r Lead L ocation (P IM) PIM 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 19 15[...]

  • Page 320

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 294 Revision 1.0 PA- CS33 Attendant Interface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REM ARKS SW0 0 SW0 1 SW10 (T AS #0) SW13 (T AS #1) SW11 (T AS #0) SW12 (T AS #0) SW14 (T AS #1) SW15 (T AS #1) SW1 6 SW1 7 ON ON OFF 1234 ON 1234 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8[...]

  • Page 321

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 295 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit PA-8LCBR Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A- 8LCB R circ u it card provid es an i nterfac e b etwee n a m axi mum of ei ght analo g voice t ermi nals and the system with a range o f 1200 (0hm) inclusi ve of te rminal resista nce. Thi s card can sen d “ Stutter Dial T one ?[...]

  • Page 322

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 296 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions related t o mo u nti ng a re sh own be l ow . 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicates univer sal slots for line/trun k ci rcuit card[...]

  • Page 323

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 297 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps and switc hes o n this circuit card is sh own i n Figure 3- 63 . Figure 3-63 Face Layout of P A-8LCBR (8LC) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s hown in th[...]

  • Page 324

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 298 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Switche s on t his circuit card h ave th e fo ll owing meaning s. Note 1: When Caller ID i s in s ervice, set SW16- 1 to O FF (Se parate mode). Note 2: V alid when SW16-1 i s set to ON (Common mode). SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW 0 [...]

  • Page 325

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 299 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit Note: Compr omise Impeda nce (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω ar e composed as follows . SWITC H SETTI NG SW 01 (BNW0 - 7) Bala ncing Net work Desi gnatio n • Each el em ent co rre- sponds to circuit s 0 - 7. BNW : Compr omis e Imp edance (EIA/TIA-464A) F or long dista nce BNW : 60 0 Ω F[...]

  • Page 326

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 300 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of the L T connector leads of thi s circuit card a nd connec ting rout e diagram ar e sho wn Figure 3-64 . Figure 3-64 L T Con necto r Leads Ac com modation PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [...]

  • Page 327

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 301 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit Figu re 3-65 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m NEA X 24 00 IP X A0 MDF Tel e phone L1 L2 B0 Rosette LC[...]

  • Page 328

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 302 Revision 1.0 PA-8LCBR Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SL OT NO . SWITCH N AME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 (M B ) SW10 SW01 (BNW 0 - 7) SW11 Fixed SW12 Fixed SW13 Fixed SW14 SW15 SW16 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1234 567 8 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON 1 2 ON[...]

  • Page 329

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 303 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit PA-16LCBE Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit c ard pro vides the int erface for 16 s tation li nes. This circ uit card is pro vided with func tions for supervis ing e ach user' s ca ll origi nation, call a n swering, r eleas e, detection of switch hook fla shing,[...]

  • Page 330

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 304 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition • The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions re l a t ed to mou nting are sh own be l ow. 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicate s universa l slots for line/ trunk cir cuit[...]

  • Page 331

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 305 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors of t his circuit c ard is sh own be l ow. Figure 3-67 F ace Lay out of PA - 16LCBE (16LC) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s[...]

  • Page 332

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 306 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP C ir c ui t ca r d m a ke bus y . DOWN × Cir c ui t c a r d m a ke bus y ca nc el . SW 0 1O F F [...]

  • Page 333

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 307 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING BN W0 ~ 7 1 ON Balan cing n etwork of No. 0 C ircuit ; For l ong dista nce. OFF × Balan cing n etwork of No. 0 C ircuit ; F or sho rt dista nc e. 2 ON Balan cing n etwork of No. 1 C ircuit ; For l ong dista nce. OFF ?[...]

  • Page 334

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 308 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING BNW8 ~ 1 5 1 ON Balan cing n etwork of No. 8 C ircuit ; For l ong dista nce. OFF × Balan cing n etwork of No. 8 C ircuit ; F or sho rt dista nc e. 2 ON Balan cing n etwork of No. 9 C ircuit ; For l ong dista nce. OFF ?[...]

  • Page 335

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 309 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW 1 1 ON Polarit y R ev ersal as Disco nnect Sign al OFF × Momentary Ope n as Disconne ct Si gnal 2O F F × Fixed 3 4 SW1-3 SW 1-4 I NTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN OFF (sta ndard ) OFF (sta ndard ) OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 0. [...]

  • Page 336

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 310 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit SW ITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST AND ARD SE TTIN G MEANING SW1 5 6 7 ON Stutt er Dia l T one A v ai lab le OFF × Stutt er Dia l T one Not A v a ila ble 8 ON Pre-sig naling is not pe rformed. OFF × Pre- sig nal ing is pe rfor med. SW1-5 SW 1-6 SWITCH SE TTING FOR MW LAMP CONTROL[...]

  • Page 337

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 311 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing ro ute diagram a re s hown i n Figure 3-68 belo w . Figure 3 -68 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39[...]

  • Page 338

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 312 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit Figure 3 -68 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01[...]

  • Page 339

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 313 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBE Line Circuit Figu re 3-69 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m NEAX2400 IPX A0 MDF Ordinar y Telepho ne L1 L2 B0 Rosett e LC[...]

  • Page 340

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 314 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBE Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SWITCH N AME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW 0 SW 1 BNW0- 7 BNW8- 15 MB DO WN Circui t card ma ke b usy cancel . ON 12 3 4 ON 1234 56 78 ON 1234 56 78 ON 1234 56 78[...]

  • Page 341

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 315 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-A Line Circuit PA-16LCBJ-A Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A-16 LC BJ-A c ir cuit c ard, wh ich i s excl usiv ely u sed i n a µ -law sy stem, pr ovides an inter face be twe en a maxim um of 16 anal og terminals a nd the syst em with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusi ve of ter minal resis- [...]

  • Page 342

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 316 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -A Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions related t o mo u nti ng a re sh own be l ow . 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicate s universa l slots for line/ trunk cir [...]

  • Page 343

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 317 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-A Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors of t his circuit c ard is sh own i n Figure 3-71 . Figure 3-71 F ace Layout of PA- 16LCBJ-A (16LC) SW 13 SW 12 SW11 (BN W 8- 1 5) SW 10 (BNW0 -7) OPE SW 0 0 (MB ) BL12-15 BL[...]

  • Page 344

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 318 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -A Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s hown in the tabl e belo w . LAMP NA ME COLOR ST A TUS MEANING OPE Green Steady Light ing Th e cir c uitr y of th e cir cu it ca rd is o per a ti ng nor mally . BL0 BL15 Green Steady Light in g[...]

  • Page 345

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 319 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-A Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANI NG SW00 (MB) UP Circ uit ca rd make bus y . DO W N Circui t card make b usy canc el. SW10 (BNW0~7)[...]

  • Page 346

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 320 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -A Line Circuit SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG ST ANDARD SET T IN G ME ANIN G CIRCUIT NO . KIND OF BAL ANCING NETWO RK SW11 (BNW8~15) 1 ON No. 8 C ompro mise OFF × 600 Ω 2 ON No. 9 C ompro mise OFF × 600 Ω 3 ON No. 10 Compro mise OFF × 600 Ω 4 ON No. 11 Compro mise OFF × 600 ?[...]

  • Page 347

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 321 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-A Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing ro ute diagram a re s hown i n Figure 3-72 . Fi gur e 3 -7 2 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 1 /2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3[...]

  • Page 348

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 322 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -A Line Circuit Fi gur e 3 -7 2 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 2 /2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 0[...]

  • Page 349

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 323 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-A Line Circuit Figu re 3-73 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m NEAX2400 I PX A0 MDF Ordi nary Te lephone L1 L2 B0 Rosette LC[...]

  • Page 350

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 324 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -A Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMAR KS PIM SW 00 (MB) UP : Ci r cu i t ca rd ma ke bus y SW 10 (BNW 0 - 7) SW 11 (BNW 8 - 15) SW 12 SW 13 ON 012 3 4 5 6 7 ON 0 123 45 67 ON 1 2 ON OFF ON (RVS) (OPEN)[...]

  • Page 351

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 325 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-B Line Circuit PA-16LCBJ-B Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A-1 6LCB J-B circ uit card , w hich is ex clus i v ely us ed in a µ -law s ystem , provi des a n i nterface b etwe en a maximum of 16 analog te rminals and the system with a ra nge of 600 (0hm) inclusi ve of termina l resist a[...]

  • Page 352

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 326 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -B Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a re sho wn bel o w. 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicate s universa l slots for line/ trunk cir cuit car ds. PIM Mounting Module[...]

  • Page 353

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 327 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-B Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps and switc hes o n this circuit card is sh own i n Figure 3- 75 . Figure 3-75 F ace Layout of PA- 16LCBJ-B (16LC) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s h[...]

  • Page 354

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 328 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -B Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Switche s on the P A-16LC BJ-B card have the fol l owing meanings . SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI N G ST ANDARD SE TTIN G MEANING SW0 0(MB) UP Ca r d m a ke - bus y ( Inserted s tate) DO W N Ca r d ma ke - bus y c a n ce l ( Operating st ate) SW 13 1O F F ×[...]

  • Page 355

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 329 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-B Line Circuit Note: Compr omise Impeda nce (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω ar e composed as follows . SWIT CH NAME SETTI NG SW -10 (BNW0 - 7) Bal ancing Netwo rk De s ig n ati on • Ea ch elem en t corresponds to circui ts 0 - 7. BNW : Compromise Impe dance (EIA/ TIA-464A) for l ong dist anc e BNW :[...]

  • Page 356

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 330 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -B Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing ro ute diagram a re s hown i n Figure 3-76 . Figure 3 -76 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 [...]

  • Page 357

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 331 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-B Line Circuit Figure 3 -76 LT Con nec tor Leads Accomm oda tion (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02[...]

  • Page 358

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 332 Revision 1.0 P A-1 6L CB J -B Line Circuit Figu re 3-77 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m NEAX240 0 IPX A0 MDF Tel ep hone L1 L2 B0 Ro sette LC[...]

  • Page 359

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 333 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBJ-B Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMAR KS PI M SW00 (MB) SW13 SW15 SW16 SW10 (BNW0-7) SW11 (BNW8-15) ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON OFF ON (RVS) (OPEN) 01234 56 7 ON 012 3 4 5 6 7 ON[...]

  • Page 360

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 334 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit PA-16LCBW Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A-16LCBW cir cuit ca rd pr ovide s an int erfac e bet ween a m aximum of 16 ana log vo ice t e rminals and the sy stem with a ra nge of 1200 inc lusi v e of termi nal resi stance. This c ard al so can send “ Stut ter Di al T one ?[...]

  • Page 361

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 335 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCB W Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-16LCBW (LC) circ uit card can be mou nted in t h e foll ow ing uni versal slots . Note: I ndicat es univer sal slots for l ine/trunk c ir cuit ca rd s. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches [...]

  • Page 362

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 336 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s hown in the tabl e belo w . LAMP NAME LA MP COLOR LAMP ST A TUS MEANING OF INDIC ATION OPE Green Steady Lighting T h e circuitry of th e ci rcu it ca rd is operating norm ally. BL0 BL15 Green Ste ady[...]

  • Page 363

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 337 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCB W Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Swit ches on the P A- 16LC BW ca rd have th e fol l ow in g me anings. Note: Compr omise Impeda nce (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 Ω. (F or North Ame rica, Other Country (µ Law)) SWITCH F UNCTION SWITCH SETT ING MEANING SW00 (M B ) Ci rcuit Ca rd Make- b usy K ey ON Ci[...]

  • Page 364

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 338 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit SW IT CH SWITCH No . FUNCTION SWITCH SETT ING MEANING SW11 (BNW8-15) Bal ancing Netwo rk Des ignati on • E ach el ement on th is swi tch corre sponds to circ uit #8-#15 . (This same as pr evious page ) SW14 1 OFF Fixed t o OFF 2O N F i x e d t o O N 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to[...]

  • Page 365

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 339 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCB W Line Circuit SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING M EANING SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed t o OFF 3 OFF Fixed t o OFF 4 OFF Fixed t o OFF SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed t o OFF 3 Me ssage W aiting La mp ON Me ssage W aiti ng La mp Flash ing (Control led b y Firmware) OFF Mess age W aitin [...]

  • Page 366

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 340 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of th e LT co nnector leads for this circui t ca rd is s hown in Figure 3- 80 . Fi gur e 3 -8 0 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 1 /2) See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 81 ). PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3[...]

  • Page 367

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 341 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCB W Line Circuit Fi gur e 3 -8 0 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 2 /2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 0[...]

  • Page 368

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 342 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit Figu re 3-81 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m A B L1 L2 PBX MDF Jack Analog Terminal LC Maximum 1200 [ Ω ] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Installation Cable LT Connector Connecting Route Dia gram for the P A-16 LCBW (LC) i s as follo ws.[...]

  • Page 369

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 343 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCB W Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 (M B ) SW10 (B NW 0-7 ) SW11 (BNW8-15) SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 ON 12345678 ON 12345678 ON 1234 ON ON 123 4 1234 ON 1234 ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) ON[...]

  • Page 370

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 344 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit PA-16LCBY Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A-1 6 L CB Y c ir cu it car d provid es a n i n te rface betw ee n a ma x im u m of 16 anal o g voi ce term ina ls an d the system with a r ange of 1200 (Ohm) inclusi ve o f ter minal resista nce. This card al so can send “ Stut t[...]

  • Page 371

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 345 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBY Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes and Connec tors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches on t his card is sh own in F igure 3- 83 . Fi gur e 3 -8 3 Face Layout of PA -16LC BY( LC) Card OPE BL15 BL0 SW00 (MB) SW10 (BNW0-7) SW11 (BNW8-15) SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW19[...]

  • Page 372

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 346 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ uit card a re s hown in the tabl e belo w . 5. Switch Setti ngs Sw i tc he s on th e P A - 16L C B Y (L C ) c ar d have t he follo wi ng m ea n ing s . LAMP NAME LAMP C OLOR L AMP S T ATUS MEANING OF INDIC ATION OPE[...]

  • Page 373

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 347 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBY Line Circuit SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING SW11 (BNW8-15) Bala ncing Netw ork Designat ion • E ach elem en t on thi s switc h corres ponds to circ uit #8 -#15. [the sam e as pre v ious pa g e] SW14 1 OFF Fi xed to OFF 2O N F i x e d t o O N 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF SW1[...]

  • Page 374

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 348 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING M EANING SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 O FF Fi xed to OFF 3 O FF Fi xed to OFF 4 O FF Fi xed to OFF SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 O FF Fi xed to OFF 3 Me ssage W aiting La mp ON Me ssage W aiti ng La mp Flash ing (Control led b y Firmware) OFF Mess age W ait[...]

  • Page 375

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 349 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBY Line Circuit Note: Compr omise Impeda nce (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 Ω . (F or North Ame rica, Other Country (µ Law)) ON OFF 350 1000 0.21 µ Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B) 600[...]

  • Page 376

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 350 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of th e LT co nnector leads for this circui t ca rd is s hown in Figure 3- 84 . Fi gur e 3 -8 4 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 1 /2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 4[...]

  • Page 377

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 351 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBY Line Circuit Fi gur e 3 -8 4 LT Conne ctor Le ad Accom m oda tio n ( 2 /2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 L[...]

  • Page 378

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 352 Revision 1.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit Figu re 3-85 Conne cting Ro ute Diagr a m A B L1 L2 PBX MDF Jack Analog Terminal LC Maximum 1200 [ Ω ] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Installation Cable LT Connector Connecting Route Dia gram for the P A-16 LCBY (LC) is a s foll o ws.[...]

  • Page 379

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 353 Revision 1.0 PA-16L CBY Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 (M B ) Note: Normal oper ating mod e is d own. SW10 (B NW 0-7 ) SW11 (BNW8-15) SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW19 ON 12345678 ON 12345678 ON 1234 ON ON 123 4 1234 ON 1234 ON 1234 ON[...]

  • Page 380

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 354 Revision 1.0 PA- 16ELCJ Electric Line Current PA-16ELCJ Elect ric Lin e Cu rrent 1. General Fu nction The P A-16 ELCJ (ELC) cir cuit car d provides an interfa ce bet ween t he D term and the IPX. Depend ing on the switc h sett ings, this c ard works in the foll owing tw o modes. • 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of [...]

  • Page 381

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 355 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ Electric Line Current 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-16ELCJ (ELC) ca rd can be mount ed in any u n iversal slot as s hown b e lo w. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in F igure 3-8[...]

  • Page 382

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 356 Revision 1.0 PA- 16ELCJ Electric Line Current 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . Note: When the P ALM lamp lights r ed, observe the followin g instructi ons. i) Identify the locati on where any in-hous e wires have a short ci rcuit in all li ne s whi ch belo[...]

  • Page 383

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 357 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ Electric Line Current 5. Switch Setti ngs Swit ch es on the P A- 16EL C J ca rd have the fo ll o w i n g me anings. SWITCH FUNCTION SW ITCH SETTING MEANING SW00 (MB) Cir cuit Ca rd Mak e- bus y key Cir cuit card Mak e-bus y Cancel. Cir cuit card Mak e-busy . SW 01 1 See T able 3-4 be low . — Al[...]

  • Page 384

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 358 Revision 1.0 PA- 16ELCJ Electric Line Current 6. E x te rn al I nter face Depending on the applie d mode ( 16ELC/8 DLC mod e), e xternal interface l eads appear on t he L T conn ect o rs as fo l l ows. • 6ELC mode Fi gur e 3 -8 8 LT Conne c tor Lead Locat ion ( 16ELC M ode) ( 1/2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3[...]

  • Page 385

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 359 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ Electric Line Current • 16ELC mode Fi gur e 3 -8 8 LT Conne c tor Lead Locat ion ( 16ELC M ode) ( 2/2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 [...]

  • Page 386

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 360 Revision 1.0 PA- 16ELCJ Electric Line Current 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODU LE SLOT No. S WITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE RE M ARKS PIM SW00 (MB) SW01 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON[...]

  • Page 387

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 361 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ-B Electronic Line Circuit PA-1 6E LC J-B Elect ronic Line Cir cuit 1. General Fu nction The P A-16ELCJ- B (ELC) circuit card provid es an interf ac e between D te rm and IPX. Depending upon th e switc h sett ings, this c ard works in the foll owing tw o modes. • 16 ELC mode: A m aximum of 16 se[...]

  • Page 388

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 362 Revision 1.0 PA-16E LCJ-B Electronic Li ne C ircuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-16ELCJ- B (ELC) card can be mounted in an y univers al slots as sh own be l ow. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in F ig[...]

  • Page 389

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 363 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . Note: When the P ALM lamp lights r ed, observe the followin g instructi ons. i) Identify the l ocation where a ny in-hous e wi res have a shor t cir cuit t [...]

  • Page 390

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 364 Revision 1.0 PA-16E LCJ-B Electronic Li ne C ircuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Switche s on the P A-16ELCJ-B card have the fol l owing meanings. SWITCH FUNCTION SW ITCH SETTING MEANING SW00 (MB) Cir cuit Ca rd Mak e- bus y key Cir cuit Car d Make -bus y Cancel. Cir cuit Car d Make -bus y . SW 10 1 LP -PM Interf ace mo de s e t[...]

  • Page 391

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 365 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ-B Electronic Line Circuit SW10-3: OF F , SW10-4: OFF S W10-3 : OFF , S W10 -4: O N SW10-5: OFF • 16 set o f D term s p er c ard. • V oice Com municati on on l y . • 8 set o f D term s per c ard. • Data Adapte r is used. SW10-5 : ON • 16 set of D term s p er c ard. • Analog Port Adapte[...]

  • Page 392

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 366 Revision 1.0 PA-16E LCJ-B Electronic Li ne C ircuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Depending upon the applied mode (16 ELC/8 DLC mode), e xter nal interf ace leads appear on th e L T conn ect o rs as fo l l ows. • 16ELC mode Fi gur e 3- 91 LT Conne ctor L ea d Acco mm oda tio n (16 EL C Mo de) (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 2[...]

  • Page 393

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 367 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ-B Electronic Line Circuit Fi gur e 3- 91 LT Conne ctor L ea d Acco mm oda tio n (16 EL C Mo de) (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1[...]

  • Page 394

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 368 Revision 1.0 PA-16E LCJ-B Electronic Li ne C ircuit • 8DLC mode Figure 3 -92 LT Connec tor Lead Accomm odation (8DL C M ode) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06[...]

  • Page 395

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 369 Revision 1.0 PA-16EL CJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODU LE SLOT No. S WITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE RE M ARKS PIM SW00 (MB) SW10 SW11 ON 1234 56 7 8 ON 123 4 5 6 7 8 ON[...]

  • Page 396

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 370 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler PA-FCHA Fus ion C al l C o nt rol H and ler 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ard is a p r ot ocol con verte r to carry the fusi on-link-da ta from/to the other node. The F usion- Link-D ata is received/tr ansferr ed fr om/t o the CP R via H U B (P A-M 96) acr oss t[...]

  • Page 397

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 371 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Con trol Handler 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The FCH can be m ounted in a uni versal slot of t he PIM. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 3-94 . Figure 3-94 Face Lay out of PA- F CHA ( F C[...]

  • Page 398

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 372 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . LAMP NAME C OLOR ST A TE OPE Gre en R emai ns l it while th is c ir cuit card is oper ati ng. LY R Green Remains lit while th e Fu s ion li nk is esta bli shed. Flash Flas[...]

  • Page 399

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 373 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Con trol Handler 5. Switch set ting Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . Note: The fo llowing op erations a re requi red prior t o extrac ti ng the card. (1.) Turn on the M N T3 sw itch . (2. ) Flip the MB sw i tc h. When t he D/I DTI ([...]

  • Page 400

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 374 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SETTING ST ANDARD SET T IN G DESCRIPTION SW11 Note 1 1 ON This S W desi gna tes the D/I channe l of the Fusio n-Link-Data . (The numbe r of D/ I cha nnels = n ) Set t he corr esponding SW(s) to “ ON ” for D /I, “ OF F ” for denia l. OFF[...]

  • Page 401

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 375 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Con trol Handler Note 1: When “ n ” i s bi gge r t han 1, the T ime Slot Se quence Inte grity (TSSI ) must be guarante ed a t the network. When “ n ” is on e or mor e, the cor responding D c hannel s a s “ n ” m us t b e de s i gnat e d b y S W 1 1 - S W 1 2 . SW12 Note 1 1 O[...]

  • Page 402

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 376 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO . SETTING ST AND AR D SETTI NG DESCRIPTION SW13 1 ON Thi s SW designate s t he D/I chann el of the Fu si on-L ink-Dat a. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set th e cor respond ing SW(s) to “ ON ” for D/ I, “ OFF ” for de nia l . OF F 2 ON [...]

  • Page 403

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 377 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Con trol Handler Note 2: D a ta s pe ed 64 kb p s i s u s ed f or t h e T1 o r E1 i n t erf a ce. Data sp e ed 56 k bps is used for the T1 interfa ce w ith bit stea ling. Data sp e ed 48 k bps is used for the T1 interfa ce w ith bot h bit st ealing and the Zero Co de Suppre ssion (or Bit[...]

  • Page 404

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 378 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler 6. E x te rn al I nter face The cable connectio ns among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are s hown bel o w. Figure 3-95 FC H/HUB/D TI Con nection 24DTR FCH 10AL (10) FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight cable DTI FCH CN2 HUB[...]

  • Page 405

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 379 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Con trol Handler See Figure 3-9 6 whe n mu l t ipl e nu m bers o f F CH ci rc uit ca rds are conn ect ed t o a 24 D T R as a cascade c on- necti o n . The FCH can be com b i n ed w i t h C CH/ D CH o n a c a s cade c onnectio n. One D TI ca rd can hav e a max i m um of f ive (5) Handle r[...]

  • Page 406

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 380 Revision 1.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Ca ll Contr o l Handler 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REM ARKS MB MNT MODE SW1 0 SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 SW1 4 ON ON OFF 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 123 4 ON 567 8 123 4 ON 567 8 1 234 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON[...]

  • Page 407

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 381 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit PA-24LCBV Lin e C irc uit 1. General Fu nction The P A- 24L CB V c ircuit c ard provide s an interf ace betwee n a maximum of 24-ana log termin als and the syste m with a range of 600 ( O h m) i nclusi v e of ter minal resist ance. This card also c an send “ Stu tter Di al T one, ?[...]

  • Page 408

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 382 Revision 1.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes and Connec tors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches on t his card is sh own in F igure 3- 98 . Figure 3-98 Face La y out of P A-24LCBV (LC) Card 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this card are shown b elo w. LED N A ME COLOR L ED ST A T[...]

  • Page 409

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 383 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Sw i tc he s on th e P A - 24L C B V (L C ) c ar d have t he follo wi ng m ea n ing s . SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING SW00 (M B ) Circ uit Car d M a ke - bus y Key OFF Circui t card Mak e-busy ca ncel ON Circui t card Mak e-bus y SW10 (B NW 0-7 ) Balan ci[...]

  • Page 410

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 384 Revision 1.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit Note 1: Compr omis e Impedance (EIA/TIA- 464A) and 600 Ω ar e as follows. SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING SW15 1 OFF Fi xed t o OFF 2 O FF Fixed t o OFF 3 O FF Fixed t o OFF 4 O FF Fixed t o OFF SW16 1 O FF Fixed t o OFF 2 O FF Fixed t o OFF 3 Me ssage W aiting La mp ON M[...]

  • Page 411

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 385 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW00 (M B ) Note: Normal oper ating mod e is d own. SW10 (B NW 0-7 ) SW11 (BNW8-15) SW12 (BNW16-23) SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 ON 123 4 ON 567 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3[...]

  • Page 412

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 386 Revision 1.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 7. E x te rn al I nter face Locat ion of the LT conne cto r lead s and L C conne ctor leads for th is c ircui t car d is shown i n Figure 3-99 . (a) PIM When t his circui t car d is m ounted in PIM, neces sary leads a ppear on the L T connector s as follo ws . Fi gur e 3 -9 9 LT Conne[...]

  • Page 413

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 387 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit Fi gur e 3 -9 9 LT Conne c tor Lead Locatio n (PI M) (2/2) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 [...]

  • Page 414

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 388 Revision 1.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit (b) L C Conne ctor Lead s Fi gu r e 3 - 10 0 LC Conne c tor L e a d Lo cat io n ( L C C ab l e ) 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6[...]

  • Page 415

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 389 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit 8. Connect ing Route Dia gram Connect ing Route Diagram f or t he P A-24LCBV(LC) is as follo ws. A and B leads for c hannels #0 - #7 appe ar from the LC Con nector located on the fr ont edge of the ca rd. Figur e 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram MDF L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 Jack Jack Ja[...]

  • Page 416

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 390 Revision 1.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 9. L C C able Connec tion Figur e 3 -1 0 2 Oute r View of LC Ca b le Earth Cable 3m (9.8 feet)[...]

  • Page 417

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 391 Revision 1.0 PA-24L CBV Line Circuit Figu re 3-103 C a ble R unnin g f or LC Cable (E x am ple) FRONT REAR LC Cable LC Cable LC Cable LT C a b l e P A-24LCBV Ear th Plate Ear th Cable[...]

  • Page 418

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 392 Revision 1.0 PA- M69 Po wer Fai l ure Tra nsf er PA-M69 P ower F ailure T ransfer 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit c ar d e xecute s a C .O. l ine to the t elephone or the rele ase of a C.O. line due t o a po wer su pply fail ure, s ystem do wn, sof tware orde r , etc. This c ircuit car d is also prov ided with the ch[...]

  • Page 419

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 393 Revision 1.0 PA-M69 Pow e r Fa ilu re Tran s f er 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions related t o mo u nti ng a re sh own be l ow . PIM Mounting Module P A-M69 P A-M69 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 18 20 21 22 23[...]

  • Page 420

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 394 Revision 1.0 PA- M69 Po wer Fai l ure Tra nsf er 3. Fac e Layout of Lamp, S witches, and Connectors The face l ayout of lamp, switc hes, and conne c tors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105 . Figu re 3-105 F ace Layou t of PA-M 69 ( PFT, 12 NCU) 4. Lamp Indica tion The con tents of la mp indication o f this c [...]

  • Page 421

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 395 Revision 1.0 PA-M69 Pow e r Fa ilu re Tran s f er 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING MB UP Circui t card make b usy DOWN × Circ uit ca rd make bus y cancel SW 0 1O N × Fi x[...]

  • Page 422

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 396 Revision 1.0 PA- M69 Po wer Fai l ure Tra nsf er 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tio n o f t he LT conne cto r l eads of this circu it c a rd, a c commo datio n of the NCU conne c tor on the f ront side of the ci rcuit card , and connect ing rou te diagram are sh o wn in Figure 3-106 . Figur e 3 -1 0 6 LT C on n[...]

  • Page 423

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 397 Revision 1.0 PA-M69 Pow e r Fa ilu re Tran s f er Figu re 3-107 NCU Con n ec to r Acc ommodati on NCU Co nn ect o r Acc ommod at io n 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 NCU0 BO00 BI00 TO00 TI00 BO01 BI01 TO01 TI01 BO02 BI02 TO02 TI02 BO03 BI03 TO03 TI03 BO04 BI04 TO04 TI04 BO05 BI[...]

  • Page 424

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 398 Revision 1.0 PA- M69 Po wer Fai l ure Tra nsf er Figur e 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MO DULE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW0 M B D OWN C ir c ui t ca r d m a ke bus y c an c e l NE A X2 40 0 IP X MDF KY7 Front Conne ctor NCU KY0 KY7 KY0 LC COT A B A B A B A B Exte rnal Key[...]

  • Page 425

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 399 Revision 1.0 PA-M96 HUB PA-M96 HUB 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit car d pro vides the r epeater functi on which is based on ANSI/ IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the 10B A SE -T por ts are locat ed on a HU B car d. As seen fr om the funct ional conne ction diagr am belo w , the HUB car d is loc ated bet w een the CPR ( LAN[...]

  • Page 426

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 400 Revision 1.0 PA- M96 HUB 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition Th e P A -M 9 6 ( H U B ) c a r d ca n be mount e d i n any u n iversal slot of PIM0 a s shown be l ow. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switches, a nd c onn ectors is shown in Figur e 3-110 . Figure 3-110 Face Lay[...]

  • Page 427

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 401 Revision 1.0 PA-M96 HUB 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . Note 1: This lamp is use d to indic ate the stat us of t he TPn-X port. Th er efor e, the ci r cuit ca rd operat es normally r e gar dless of the cable polari ty . Note 2: This cir cuit car d c an de[...]

  • Page 428

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 402 Revision 1.0 PA- M96 HUB 5. Switch Setti ng Standa rd settings fo r swit ches on this circuit car d are sho wn in the table belo w . SWITCH NAM E SE T TI NG ST AN D ARD SETT ING DESCRIPTION MB UP C i rc u it c a r d M a ke - bus y . DO W N × C i rc u it c ar d M a ke - bus y ca n ce l . SENSE 0 Polarit y indi cation o [...]

  • Page 429

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 403 Revision 1.0 PA-M96 HUB 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/ DTI/LA N I Connecti on 24DTR CN2 FCH FCH PZ-PC19 (LANI) 10 BASE-T straight Cable 10 BASE-T straight Cable HUB 10AL (10) FLT CA DTI[...]

  • Page 430

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 404 Revision 1.0 PA- M96 HUB 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB SE L ON 2[...]

  • Page 431

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 405 Revision 1.0 PA-M 103 HUB PA-M103 HUB 1. General Fu nction This ci rcuit car d i s a class II HUB card base d on IEEE802.3 (10B ASE- T)/IEEE802.3 u (100 B ASE-TX), which i s locate d between 100M Ether ca rd (PZ-PC22/P Z-PC23) and FCCH card tha t establi shes Fus ion link to t he syste m. This c ircui t card pro vide s [...]

  • Page 432

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 406 Revision 1.0 PA-M103 HUB 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-M103 ( HUB) card c an b e mounted in an y u n iversal slot of P IM a s shown be l o w. 3. Fac e Layout of Connector s The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in Fi gu r e 3 - 11 3 . Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M 103 (HUB) C[...]

  • Page 433

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 407 Revision 1.0 PA-M 103 HUB 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . 5. Switch Setti ngs No switch setti ngs a re re quired. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION OP E G r e en Re ma ins lit w h il e thi s c ir c uit c ar d i s in no rm al op era ti on PW ALM[...]

  • Page 434

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 408 Revision 1.0 PA-M103 HUB 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figu re 3-114 Extern al Interface fo r P A-M1 0 3 ( HUB) Ca rd 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet No switch setti ngs a re requir ed. PZ-PC22(LANI) HUB 100 BASE-TX Straight Cable (PA-M103)[...]

  • Page 435

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 409 Revision 1.0 PA- 8R ST K Register Sender T runk PA-8RSTK Reg ister Sen der T runk 1. General Fu nction This ci rc uit ca rd is an 8- ci rc u it r eg i ster sender trunk c a r d which tr ans m its an d se n d s sel ective sig nals ( DP signa ls, P B signals , M F si gnal s). Figu re 3-115 Lo c atio n of P A-8RST K (8R ST[...]

  • Page 436

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 410 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTK Register Send er Trunk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions related t o mo u nti ng a re sh own be l ow . 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicates univer sal slots for line/trun k ci[...]

  • Page 437

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 411 Revision 1.0 PA- 8R ST K Register Sender T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors of t his circuit c ard is sh own i n Figure 3-116 . Fig ure 3-116 Face Layout of P A - 8R STK ( 8 R S T) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of [...]

  • Page 438

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 412 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTK Register Send er Trunk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG MB UP Circuit card make b u sy . DOWN × Circ uit ca rd make bus y cancel . MBR0~3 0 ON Registe[...]

  • Page 439

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 413 Revision 1.0 PA- 8R ST K Register Sender T runk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG MBR4~7 7 ON Register mak e b usy of the co rres pond ing ci r cuit . OFF × Regi ster make b usy cancel of the corr espondin g circu it. MBS0 ~3 0 ON Sender make b usy of the corr esponding circuit . OFF × Sende[...]

  • Page 440

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 414 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTK Register Send er Trunk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG SW 0 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF 4 ON OFF 5 ON OFF 6 ON OFF 7O F F × Threshol d v alue is not sel ected ( F ix ed to OF F). 8O N × Fixed. SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0 - 3 PBR THRESH O LD VA L U[...]

  • Page 441

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 415 Revision 1.0 PA- 8R ST K Register Sender T runk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG SW 1 1 ON MFR Re ce ive Spec ifica ti o n; A T& T OF F M F R Re ce ive Spec ifi ca ti o n; C C I TT No . 5 2 ON PBR PULSE TIMER (Moment ary S ignal Shu t Down Pr otect T imer) SHOR T (Shorte r than 10 ms.) OF[...]

  • Page 442

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 416 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTK Register Send er Trunk 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SWITCH N AME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MBR0-3 MBR4-7 MBS0-3 MBS4-7 SW 0 SW 1 MB DO WN Circui t card ma ke b usy cancel ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 12 3 4 56 7 8 ON 12 3 4 56 7 8[...]

  • Page 443

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 417 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STM Register Sender T runk PA-8RSTM Reg ister Sen der T runk 1. General Fu nction This c ircu it car d is an 8-ci rcuit re giste r sen der tru nk card that tr ansmits and sends sele cti v e si gnals ( DP sig- nals, PB si gnals, MF signals). Fig ure 3-117 Locati on of t he PA-8R STM ( 8 RST ) Card in t[...]

  • Page 444

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 418 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTM Register Send er Trunk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations f or thi s cir cuit card and t he conditi ons related to mount ing are s ho wn bel o w. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face l ayout of lamps, switches, a nd connector s for thi s circ uit car[...]

  • Page 445

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 419 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STM Register Sender T runk 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . 5. Switch Setti ngs Stand ar d s et ting s f or various s w itche s o n t h i s cir cuit card ar e s hown in t he ta bl e b elo w. LAMP NAME CO LO R ST A TE OPE Green Rema ins l[...]

  • Page 446

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 420 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTM Register Send er Trunk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG MBR4~7 (SW03) 7 ON Regist er Make -b usy of the co rresponding circui t. OFF × Regi s t er Make -busy c a ncel of the correspon ding cir cuit. MBS0 ~3 (SW02) 0 ON Se nder Make-b usy of the cor responding c ircuit [...]

  • Page 447

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 421 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STM Register Sender T runk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG SW10 1 ON × OFF 2 ON × OFF 3 ON OFF × 4 ON OFF × 5 ON OFF × 6 ON × OFF 7O F F × Threshol d v a lue is not sel ected ( F ixed to OFF). 8O N × Fi xed. SELEC TI ON O F PBR TH R ESH O LD V AL UE SW10-1 SW1 0-2 [...]

  • Page 448

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 422 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTM Register Send er Trunk SWITCH NAM E SWITCH NO. SE TTIN G STANDARD SETTING ME ANI NG SW11 1 ON MFR Re ce ive Spec ifica ti o n; A T& T OF F M F R Re ce ive Spec ifi ca ti o n; IT U - T No. 5 2 ON PBR PULSE TIMER (Moment ary S ignal Shu t Down Pr otect T imer) SHOR T (Shorte r than 10 ms.) OFF P[...]

  • Page 449

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 423 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STM Register Sender T runk 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SWITCH N AME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MBR0-3 (SW01) MBR4-7 (SW03) MBS0-3 (SW02) MBS4-7 (SW04) SW10 SW11 MB DO WN Circuit ca rd Mak e-busy ca ncel ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 ON 12 3 4 56 7 8 ON 12 3 4 56 7 8[...]

  • Page 450

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 424 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTY Register Send er Trunk PA-8RSTY Reg ister Sen der T runk 1. General Fu nction The P A- 8RSTY cir cuit card is equipp ed with eight ci rcuits of Regi sters and S e nders. M ore spec if ically , this card conta ins Dial Pulse Re gist er (DPR), P u sh Button Recei ve r ( PBR) f or r ecei ving digi ts[...]

  • Page 451

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 425 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STY Register Sender T runk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-8RSTY (RST ) card can be moun ted any u niversal slots as s hown b e lo w. Note: I ndicates univ ers al slots for line /trunk ci r c uit car ds. 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switch[...]

  • Page 452

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 426 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTY Register Send er Trunk 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . LAMP NAME COL OR ST A TE OPE Green Re ma ins lit while thi s circ uit card is operat ing . BL R0 BL R7 Gre en Light s whe n the cor r es pondin g ci rcuit has r[...]

  • Page 453

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 427 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STY Register Sender T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . SWITCH NAME SWITC H N O. SET TING ST AND ARD SETT ING MEANING MB (SW0 0) UP Circui t card make bus y DOWN × Circui t card make bus y canc el SW0 1 (MBR0-7) 0 ON R eg[...]

  • Page 454

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 428 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTY Register Send er Trunk SWI TCH FUNCTI ON SWITC H SE TTING MEANING SW10 1 3 DTMF Sign al R ecei v er Threshol d Value [Stan dard Setti ng] 4 OFF Fixe d to OFF SW11 1 3 MFR Si gna l Recei ver Threshol d Value [Stan dard Setti ng] 4 OFF Fixe d to OFF 1 2 3 4 - 1 2 3 4 ON OFF Sel ect ion of P BR Thr e[...]

  • Page 455

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 429 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STY Register Sender T runk SWI TCH FUNCT ION SWIT CH SETT ING MEANI NG SW12 1 Design ation of MFR Spec ifi catio n • AT & T spe cific ation • ITU-T No. 5 s p ecifi catio n 2 D TM F Si gnal Cut-off Guard Timer • SHO R T (le s s t h an 10 ms ) [Stan dard Se tti ng] • LONG (less tha n 20 ms) [...]

  • Page 456

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 430 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTY Register Send er Trunk SWITCH S WITCH NO . SETTI N G ST ANDARD SETT ING MEANING SW1 3 1 ON MF Tra nsmi ssio n Le vel :-9 dBm OFF M F Tran smissi o n Leve l :-5dBm 2 OFF × Fixed t o OFF 3 OFF × Fixed t o OFF 4 OFF × Fixed t o OFF SW1 4 1 OFF × Fixed t o OFF 2 OFF × Fixed t o OFF 3 OFF × Fixed[...]

  • Page 457

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 431 Revision 1.0 PA-8R STY Register Sender T runk 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SL O T NO. SWIT CH NAME SWITCH S HAPE RE MARKS PI M SW00 (MB) Circu it card make bu sy c ancel Standa rd Sett ing : Down SW01 (MBR0-7) SW02 (MBS0 -7) SW10 SW11 ON 7 6 5 4 ON 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 ON 3 2 1 8 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4[...]

  • Page 458

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 432 Revision 1.0 PA- 8RSTY Register Send er Trunk PI M SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 MODULE SL O T NO. SWIT CH NAME SWITCH S HAPE RE MARKS 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4[...]

  • Page 459

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 433 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital T runk 1. General Fu nction The P A-SDT A circuit car d provi des a maximum of 28 interfac e (1.5 Mbps) used with the f iber opt ic cable. This card h as al so t he MUX func tion a nd is c onne cted dire ct ly to the T SW ca rd. This card i s us e[...]

  • Page 460

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 434 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit card is mounte d in a uni ve rsal sl ot ne xt t o (eithe r left or ri ght side of) P A-SDTB. When t his card is pro vided in a dual c onf iguratio n, mount this car d on both s ides o f P A- SDTB. Mountin g condit ions are sho[...]

  • Page 461

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 435 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk Example: When t he P A-SDT A card is mounted in the 1-IMG syst em In F igure 3 -122 , time slot s of Module Gr oup 01 ar e used. A UNT data is requir ed e ve n if P IM2/PIM3 is not a ctually mounted. Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System ( TS of PIM3 is use[...]

  • Page 462

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 436 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut f or la mps, s witches, and connector s a re sho wn in Figur e 3-123 . Figure 3-12 3 Face La yout of PA-SDTA (SDT) MB PCM SC P-SW I/O SW11 SW12 OPE ACT PALM OPT SYNC LPB 12345678 12345678[...]

  • Page 463

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 437 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow . L A MP N A ME COL OR ST A TE OPE G ree n R em ain s l it w hi le th is ci rcu it ca rd is op er ati n g n orm al ly . Red Remains li t w hil e thi s c ircuit card i s in Make-[...]

  • Page 464

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 438 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings on thi s cir cuit card are s hown in the tabl e belo w . . SW ITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG ST A ND ARD SETT ING MEANING MB UP C i rc u it c a r d M a ke - bus y DOWN × Cir c uit card Mak e-bu sy cancel SW11 1O F F × Fixed 2O N × [...]

  • Page 465

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 439 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk 6. E x te rn al I nter face • Cable Connecti on Figure 3-12 4 Cable Co nn ection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB PA-SDTB PA-SDTA Fiber optic cable Note1 SDT CABLEB <S> Note 1: W hen the P A- SDT A car d is pr ovided in a dual c onfi guration, SDT CAB LEA ( D) is used.[...]

  • Page 466

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 440 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk • When t he P A-SDT A/P A-SDTB card i s mounte d in the 1- IMG system As shown in Figur e 3-125 , time sl ots of Module Group 01 are used. A UNT da t a is requir ed e ve n if PIM2/ PIM3 is not actuall y mounted. Figu re 3-125 Ex ample o f Cab l e Connec t io n f or 1-I M[...]

  • Page 467

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 441 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk • When the P A -S DT A an d P A-S D T B car ds are mo unt ed in the 4-I MG s yst em (a) When t o use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable When t he P A-SDT A and P A-SDTB c ards a re mounte d in th e 4-IMG sy stem, th e 34PH MT24 TS W CA-x c able i s used for conne ction b etwee[...]

  • Page 468

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 442 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk (b) Relationshi p betw een the c able connect ion and the time slot T runk da t a fo r S DT is assigned to an odd-n um b e r Mod ul e G r oup. The m odule group is determi ned by the connec t i on of t h e 34 PH M T 24 TSW C A-x cable as shown in the table b e low. Note 1:[...]

  • Page 469

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 443 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk Example: When the P A-SDT A and P A-SDTB circuit c ar ds are mounte d in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 ( PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3) is assi gne d for the SDT inte rfa ce, the type of cabl e and connector loc ations ar e as shown in the follo wing f igure. The mounting l ocation o f P[...]

  • Page 470

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 444 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk Figure 3-127 L ocation o f MUXxxx Conne ctors for SD T MUX003 MUX002 MUX013 MUX012 MUX023 MUX022 MUX033 MUX032 MUX103 MUX102 MUX113 MUX112 MUX123 MUX122 MUX133 MUX132 MUXxxx Connectors for SDT[...]

  • Page 471

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 445 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk (c) Length of Fiber Opt ic Cab le The m ax i m um le ngt h o f the fiber o p tic ca ble is approximately 15 k il ometers (9.3 mi les). Figure 3- 128 sho ws the le ve l diagram of t he f iber opti c interfa c e. Figure 3-128 Level Diagram Level m ar gin in the ca se of 15 k[...]

  • Page 472

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 446 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Di gital T runk • Accommodat ion f or the L T connec tor l eads of this circuit card is sh own in Figure 3- 129 . Fig ure 3-129 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21[...]

  • Page 473

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 447 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTA SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S W ITCH SHAPE REM ARKS MB SW 11 SW 12 P- SW ON 1 234 ON 5 6 7 8 1 234 ON 5 6 7 8 1 ON 234[...]

  • Page 474

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 448 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTB SDH/SONET Di gital T runk PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital T runk 1. General Fu nction The P A-SDT A circuit car d provi des a maximum of 28 interfac e (1.5 Mbps) used with the f iber opt ic cable. This card also has the MUX function and is connected dir ectly to the TSW card. This card is used with the P[...]

  • Page 475

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 449 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTB SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition This c ircuit c ard can be mounted in a ny u nive rsal slots. Mountin g condit ions are shown be low. • Only t he powe r is supplie d from B ack Wi ring B oard (BWB). • This car d is c onnected to the P A-SDT A ca rd u sing the fol lowi[...]

  • Page 476

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 450 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTB SDH/SONET Di gital T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layo ut of lamps , switche s, a nd c onnector s a re sho wn in the f igure i n F igure 3- 131 . Figure 3-13 1 Face La yout of PA-SDTB (SDT) MB PCM MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B I/O OPE 2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0 [...]

  • Page 477

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 451 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTB SDH/SONET Dig it al Trunk 4. Lamp Indica tions Lamp indicati ons f or this circ uit card are sho wn i n the ta ble bel ow: Note: A-sid e MUX me ans the card located in U NIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card locat ed in UNIT2/3 . LAMP NAME C OLOR ST A TE OPE Green R emai ns l it when t his ci rcu it[...]

  • Page 478

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 452 Revision 1.0 PA- SDTB SDH/SONET Di gital T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings f or t his cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the table belo w: 6. E x te rn al I nter face Refer t o th e P A-SDT A circui t ca rd . 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SETTIN G ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING MB UP Circuit c ard Make-b usy DO[...]

  • Page 479

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 453 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler 1. General Fu nction Equ ipp ed w i t h t w o ci rcu i t s of C o mm o n Ch an n el H an d l er s (CC Hs) , the P A -2 C CH A ci rc u it card pr o v id es two signa ling l inks for a digita l/analog Common Chan nel Inter of fi ce Signal ing ([...]

  • Page 480

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 454 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Cha nnel Handler 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A- 2 CC HA (CCH) car d can be mounted i n any uni versal sl ots as sho wn belo w . The DTI and CCH c ard , ho we ve r , cann o t c oe xis t in th e same Hig hwa y B lock. The P A-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted i n the foll owing u niv[...]

  • Page 481

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 455 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on this c ircuit card i s shown in Figure 3-133 . Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ ui[...]

  • Page 482

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 456 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Cha nnel Handler 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SWI TCH NAME SW I T C H NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SETTIN G MEAN ING MB O N Circui t card ma ke bus y OF F × Circui t card ma ke bus y cancel SW0 1 0 ON No.[...]

  • Page 483

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 457 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler Note: When SW10-4 i s set ON, S W10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be se t ON. When SW10-8 i s set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be se t ON. SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG S T AND ARD SE TTIN G MEANING SW1 0 4 ON Modem is use d in No. 0 Ci rcuit OFF Modem is n ot used [...]

  • Page 484

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 458 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Cha nnel Handler SWI TCH NAME SWIT CH NO . SETTI NG ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW1 3 (for No. 0 Circuit ) SW1 4 (for No. 1 Circuit ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON Mode setti ng; No. 7 PCR (Pre vent iv e Cy clic Retra nsmissi on metho d) OFF Mode setti ng; No. 7 CCIS 7 8 SETTIN G OF TIME SLO T NUMBER OF D[...]

  • Page 485

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 459 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler 6. E x te rn al I nter face In analo g CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on L T connec tors as follo ws. See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m for Digit al/Analog CCIS. Figur e 3 -134 LT C on n ec tor Le ad Acco m mo d atio n (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31[...]

  • Page 486

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 460 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Cha nnel Handler Figur e 3 -134 LT C on n ec tor Le ad Acco m mo d atio n (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 12 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 [...]

  • Page 487

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 461 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler Figur e 3 -1 3 5 Conn e c tin g R ou te Di agram ( Digita l C C IS) DTI TA TB TA TB PBX MDF RA RA RB RB POUTA POUTB To PLO TRK DCH/ CCH TRK DCH/ CCH TRK DCH/ CCH TRK DCH/ CCH CN2 CCH Note DTI Note: A maximum of 7CCH cards can be connected to a DTI card. CCH Multiple Connect[...]

  • Page 488

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 462 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Cha nnel Handler Figure 3 -136 Connecting Route Di agram (Analog CCIS) RD SG RD SG PBX MDF ER ER RT RT ST2 RS MODEM ST2 RS SD SD 15-m (50-foot) cable limit <Available MODEM> • synchronous • 2400, 4800, 9600 bps • 4-wire • Full Duplex CCH • Analog CCIS (with MODEM)[...]

  • Page 489

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 463 Revision 1.0 PA-2CCHA Commo n Ch annel Handler 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MO DU LE SLOT NO. SWI TC H NAME S WITCH SH APE REMAR KS PIM SW01 SW01-2 and 3 : Not us ed SW 02 SW 10 SW 11 Stand a rd S ettin g SW 12 Stand a rd S ettin g SW 13 SW 14 MB DO W N Circu it card ma ke busy ca ncel ON 3 2 1 0 ON 3 2 1 0 1234 567 8 ON 1 [...]

  • Page 490

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 464 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk PA-24CCTA Co mm on C han ne l T run k 1. General Fu nction The P A- 24 CC T A (24CCT) circu it card pro vides an i nterf ace between 24 digi tal trunks a nd the system at 1.5 M bit /s. Being equippe d with a Common Channel Han dler (CCH) , which can be allocated t o a de sir[...]

  • Page 491

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 465 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-24CCT A (24CCT) card can be mounted in th e fol l owing univer sal slot s as shown b e low. This c ard is mounte d in the follo wing shaded sl ots. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 [...]

  • Page 492

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 466 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f a ce la yout of lamps, switc hes, and conne ctor on this cir cuit card is s hown i n F i gur e 3- 1 38 . Note that there are t wo typ es of PA-24 CC TA cards whi ch d iffe r in t heir face layout s. Figure 3 -138 Fa[...]

  • Page 493

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 467 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in T a ble 3-9 . Table 3-9 PA-2 4CCTA (24C C T) L amp Indicat ion Reference LAMP NAME COL OR ST A T E OPE Green Remains lit whi le this circuit card is in normal operat ion. N-OPE R e[...]

  • Page 494

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 468 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . Figu re 3-139 Ava ilabl e Locat io ns f or Loop back Te sting SW IT CH SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW00/ MB UP Circui t card ma ke bus y DOWN ×[...]

  • Page 495

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 469 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW02/ MODE Transmis sion Guard T imer Set ting (s ec.) 0 × 4 ( sec.) 15 ( s e c . ) 26 ( s e c . ) 37 ( s e c . ) 48 ( s e c . ) 59 ( s e c . ) 6 10 (sec.) 7 11 (sec.) 8 12 (sec.) 9 13 (sec.) A 14 (sec.) B 15 (s [...]

  • Page 496

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 470 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk SW11/ 39 1 ON PAD Co ntrol OFF × 2 ON × OFF 3 ON × Data PAD Control OFF 4 ON × OFF 5 ON × T Signal Control OFF 6 ON OFF × 7 ON × R Si gnal Cont rol OFF 8 ON OFF × SW12/ 58 1 ON Equali zer Sett ing OFF 2 ON OFF 3 ON OFF SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETT[...]

  • Page 497

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 471 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk SWITC H NAME SWITC H NO . SETTI NG ST AN D ARD SETTIN G MEANI NG SW12/ 58 4 ON PAD Pa ttern S electio n Note: When se tting thi s k e y , r efer to Di git al P AD Sett ing T a ble. OFF × 5 ON × OFF 6 ON × OFF 7 ON × Al ar m Send i n g w h en t h is cir cu i t ca rd i s i[...]

  • Page 498

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 472 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk SW15/ 25 1 ON × Impedanc e Settin g: 100 Ω OFF Im peda nce Set ting: 110 Ω 2 ON Set ting o f Tra nsmissi on Transformer Mid dle Poi nt: Ground OFF × Setti ng o f Tra nsmissi on Transformer Mid dle Point: Open 3 ON Set ting o f Rec eiving Transf ormer Middl e Point : Gr[...]

  • Page 499

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 473 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk SWITC H NAME SWITC H NO . SETT IN G ST AND ARD SET T ING ME ANING SW18/1 1B 1 O N Fi xed to a ll ON 2O N 3O N 4O N 5 ON Se lect ion of CCH : Bui l t-in CCH OF F Sele ction of CCH : Extern al CCH (To be used to geth er with PA-2CCHA card) 6 ON Se lection of Co mmon Chan nel S[...]

  • Page 500

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 474 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk Digi tal P AD Set ti ng T a ble f or P A-2 4CCT A As mention e d in Ge neral Function, this c ard is e quipped with a mask R OM in which the fol lowing typi c al P AD patte rn s have been al re ady wr itten . P A D value is deter mi n ed by se le ct i ng a des ired P AD p at[...]

  • Page 501

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 475 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fig ure 3-140 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 141 ). PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 [...]

  • Page 502

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 476 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk Figur e 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram TA TB RA RB POUTA POUTB TA RA RB TB DIU1A DIU1B PLO PBX MDF 1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1 Installation Cable 24CCT CCIS NETWORK Note 2 OUT IN Note 1 : Thi s cable connection i s re quir ed when cl ock signal s mus t be ext r acted fro[...]

  • Page 503

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 477 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Comm on Channe l Trunk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SL O T NO . SWIT CH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM S W00/MB DO WN Ci rcuit card make bus y can cel SW01/ 13B SW 02 (MODE) St andard Set ting SW10/4 D 24-mu lti fra me CCT Standard 12-mu lti fra me CCT Standard SW11/ 39 SW12/ 58 SW13/6C • F ix[...]

  • Page 504

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 478 Revision 1.0 PA-24CCTA Commo n Cha nnel Trunk MODULE SL O T NO . SWIT CH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW14/5 D • 24 -multiframe CCT Sta ndard • 12 -multiframe CCT Sta ndard SW15/ 25 SW17/6 G SW18/ 11B SW 19/ 138 1 ON 2 3 4 123 4 ON 1 ON 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON 1 ON 23 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 234 56 78 1 ON 2 3 4[...]

  • Page 505

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 479 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler 1. General Fu nction This c ircui t card contr ols D c hannels of ISDN Line. Thi s cir cuit c ard pro vides 2- circ uit D-chan nel Handler (DC H). Figure 3-142 Loca ti o n of PA-2DCHA (2 DCH) w i t hin th e Sy ste m ILC TSW DLC LC 24D T I DCH PLO DSU I[...]

  • Page 506

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 480 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D-Channel Ha ndler 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a nd the conditions related t o mo u nti ng a re sh own be l ow . • This c ircuit c ard must be mount ed in a sl ot on the left s ide of the slot in whi ch DTI card is mounted . • This c ircuit c a[...]

  • Page 507

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 481 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors of t his circuit c ard is sh own i n Figure 3-143 . Fig ure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2 DCHA (2 DCH) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications of thi s circ u[...]

  • Page 508

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 482 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D-Channel Ha ndler 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of v arious switch es on this cir cuit card ar e sho wn in t he table b elo w . SWITCH NAME SW ITCH NO . SET TI N G ST AND ARD SE TTIN G MEANING MB UP Circui t card ma ke bus y DOWN × Circ uit ca rd make b usy ca ncel SW 01 0 ON No. 0 Circu[...]

  • Page 509

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 483 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler Note: When SW10-4 i s set ON, S W10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be se t ON. When SW10-8 i s set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be se t ON. SW 10 1 2 3 4 ON Modem is used in No. 0 Ci rcuit OFF Modem is n ot used in No. 0 Circ uit. 5 6 7 8 ON Modem is used in No. 1 Ci rcuit. OFF Mod[...]

  • Page 510

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 484 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D-Channel Ha ndler SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING SW 13 (for No. 0 Cir cuit) SW 14 (for No. 1 Cir cuit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON D Channel Mode S ele ction; Ne twork Si de OFF D Channe l Mode Sele ction; User Side 7 8 SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSER T SW13 -1/ SW14 -1 [...]

  • Page 511

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 485 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing ro ute diagram a re s hown i n Figure 3-144 . Figu re 3-144 LT Co n nect or Lead s Ac com m oda tion (1/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 3[...]

  • Page 512

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 486 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D-Channel Ha ndler Figu re 3-144 LT Co n nect or Lead s Ac com m oda tion (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 12 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 12 11 09[...]

  • Page 513

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 487 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler Figu re 3-145 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (1/2 ) NEAX2400 IPX MDF DSU DCH DTI Front Cable connect ion DCH DTI/CCT TRK CN2 Front • When m odem i s not used Note: F or cr os s conne ctions between DTI and D-c hannel common channel signal ling line , r efer to the e xpla- nation[...]

  • Page 514

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 488 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D-Channel Ha ndler Figu re 3-145 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (2/2 ) NEAX2400 I PX MDF MODEM DCH • When mode m is used SG RD ER RT ST2 RS SD SG RD ER RT ST2 RS SD • Cable l ength i s m aximum 15 mete rs (50 f eet). • T he mod em t o be used i s a sy nchronou s mod em of 2400, 4 800, o r 9600 [...]

  • Page 515

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 489 Revision 1.0 PA-2DCHA D - Channel Handler 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . S WITCH NA ME SWITCH SHAPE RE MARKS PIM SW01 SW01-2, 3 : Not used SW 02 SW 10 SW 11 1 : A T & T Be ll 5 : A T & T C ommunica tion SW 12 1 : A T & T Be ll 5 : A T & T C ommunica tion SW 13 SW 14 MB DO W N Circuit ca rd ma[...]

  • Page 516

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 490 Revision 1.0 PA- ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circui t PA-ILCG ISDN T ermina l Line Circui t 1. General Fu nction This circ uit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunct ion with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB- A to provide H11 term inal (1.5 36 Mbps ) with D-ch anne l s ig nal. IS DN BRI (Bas ic Rat e Interfa ce) term inal (64 K bps[...]

  • Page 517

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 491 Revision 1.0 PA- IL CG ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PA-I LCG ( ILC) c ard can be mounted in the following s haded s lo ts. Mountin g condit ions for this ci rcuit ca rd are as follo ws: 1. Thi s circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.[...]

  • Page 518

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 492 Revision 1.0 PA- ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 3. Fac e Layout of Lamps and S wi tch es The fac e layout of lamps and switch es is shown in Figure 3-147 . Figure 3-14 7 Face La yout of PA-ILCG (ILC) OPE N-OPE MB KEY MODE 0 MODE 1 SW06 1234 567 8 PKT PWR4 LYR4 BL41 BL42 SW05 1234 567 8 SW04 1234 567 8 SW01 1234[...]

  • Page 519

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 493 Revision 1.0 PA- IL CG ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons on this cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the t a ble below: Ta ble 3 -1 1 PA -ILC G Lam p In dica t ions Refe r enc e LAMP NAME COLOR ST A TE OPE Gre en Re mains lit wh ile this ci rc uit c ard is in n ormal o pe rati[...]

  • Page 520

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 494 Revision 1.0 PA- ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SW IT CH NAM E SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG S T AND ARD SE TTIN G MEANING MB UP Circuit ca rd make-b usy DOWN C ircuit ca rd make-b usy canc el SW01 1O N × F ixe d to ON[...]

  • Page 521

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 495 Revision 1.0 PA- IL CG ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit Note: The terms P oint-to-P oint (P- P) us ed in this ta ble hav e no r elation t o the actual wiring c onfigu ra tion. SW06 1O N × Not used (Fixed to ON) 2O N × Not used (Fixed to ON) 3O N × Not used (Fixed to ON) 4O N × Not used (Fixed to ON) 5O N × Da ta lin k m[...]

  • Page 522

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 496 Revision 1.0 PA- ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 6. E x te rn al I nter face Accommodat ion of th e LT co nnector leads for this circui t ca rd is s hown in Figure 3- 148 . Fig ure 3-148 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 149 ). 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 3[...]

  • Page 523

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 497 Revision 1.0 PA- IL CG ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit Figur e 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram RA RB TA TB TA RA RB TB 24DTR/ 24PRTB-A PBX MDF ILC Modular Rosette Modular Rosette ISDN Terminal H11 Terminal/ Terminal Adapter MJ-8SR MJ-8S RA RB TA TB TA RA RB TB[...]

  • Page 524

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 498 Revision 1.0 PA- ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITC H NAME SWITCH S HAPE RE MARKS MB SW01 SW04 SW05 SW06 MODE 0 MODE 1 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6[...]

  • Page 525

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 499 Revision 1.0 PA-4I L CH ISDN Line Ci rcuit PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit 1. General Fu nction The P A -4ILCH i s a li ne cir cuit card wh ich accomm od ates ISDN T er minal via N T1. The ma in feature s of this c ircu i t car d ar e shown be low : • A m axim um of four B as ic Rate Inte rface (BRI) terminals can be ac co[...]

  • Page 526

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 500 Revision 1.0 PA- 4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-4ILCH (4I LC) ca rd can be mounted in an y univers al slot as s hown bel o w . 00 01 02 0 3 0 4 05 06 0 7 08 09 10 1 1 12 13 14 1 5 16 17 18 1 9 20 21 2 2 23 Note: Indicates univer sal slots for line/trun k ci rcuit cards . PIM Mounting Mo[...]

  • Page 527

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 501 Revision 1.0 PA-4I L CH ISDN Line Ci rcuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of e ach lamp, switc h and connector on t his circui t car d is s hown in Figure 3 -151 . Figure 3-151 F ace Lay out of PA - 4ILCH (4I LC) BER3 LYR 3 BL32 BL31 BER2 LYR 2 BL21 BL22 BER1 BL12 LYR 1 BL11 BER0[...]

  • Page 528

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 502 Revision 1.0 PA- 4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indication o n this circuit card are sho wn belo w. Note: Est ablishmen t of sync hr onization on U Refer ence P oint may r equir e 30 seconds or mor e . LAMP NAME CO LOR MEANING OPE Green Lig hts when the car d is in n orma l oper at i[...]

  • Page 529

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 503 Revision 1.0 PA-4I L CH ISDN Line Ci rcuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Switche s on t his card h av e the f ollowi ng me anings. SWITC H NAME SW IT C H NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP Cir c ui t c ar d m ake bus y DOWN × Cir c ui t c a r d m ake bu s y ca nc el MBR 0 ON Line 0 make busy requ est OFF × Line 0 ma[...]

  • Page 530

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 504 Revision 1.0 PA- 4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit Note: P AD contr ol i s shown bel o w. SW11 1O N × Fixed 2O N × Fixed 3O N × Fixed 4O N × Fixed 5O N × Fixed 6O N × Fixed 7O N × Fixed 8 ON Sealing Curre nt is n ot sup pli ed. OFF × Seali ng Curre nt is s upplied . SW12 1 ~ 3 4O N × Fixed 5O N × Fixed 6O N × Fixed 7O [...]

  • Page 531

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 505 Revision 1.0 PA-4I L CH ISDN Line Ci rcuit Note 1: The terms P o int-to-P oint (P-P) and P oint- to-Multi point ( P-mP) used i n this t able h ave no r elati on to the actua l wiri ng conf igur atio n. Note 2: This swit ch mus t be set according to the specifi c ation of the I SDN t ermi nal. SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SE[...]

  • Page 532

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 506 Revision 1.0 PA- 4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit 6. Exte rn al Interfa ce Accom m oda tion of th e L T connector le ads of t his circu it ca rd and conne ct ing rou te diagram ar e s hown in Figure 3-152 . Figur e 3 -1 5 2 LT C on n ector Le ads A c c ommo da ti on PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4[...]

  • Page 533

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 507 Revision 1.0 PA-4I L CH ISDN Line Ci rcuit Figur e 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram MDF PI M NT1 A B ILC A B[...]

  • Page 534

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 508 Revision 1.0 PA- 4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . S WITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MB U P: C i rcu i t ca rd ma ke busy DOWN: Circuit card m ake b usy canc el MBR LP B MODE SW 10 SW 11 SW 12 SW 20 SW 21 ON OFF ON No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 OFF ON No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 3 1 2 3 4 ON 1[...]

  • Page 535

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 509 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit PA-8ILCE-A ISDN T ermina l Line Circui t 1. General Fu nction The P A-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card pro vides an inte rfa ce betwee n the syst em and a maximum of eight ISD N BR I (B a si c Rate Inte rf ace) te rmina l s, al l ow i n g t he sy s tem to us e e i g h t ISDN[...]

  • Page 536

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 510 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-8IL C E-A c ard can be m ou nted in a ny un ivers al slots a s shown b elow. Note: The cir cuit car d cannot be mou nted in sl ot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use G r oup0 ( G =00) of Unit0 (U=0) o f e ven-number Module Gr[...]

  • Page 537

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 511 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The f ace l ayout of la mps, switches, a nd connectors on the cir cuit card is s hown in Fi gur e 3-155 . Figure 3-155 Face Lay out of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) OPE MB SW02 SW03 SW06 SW04 SW05 N-OPE BL02 BL01 LYR0 PWR0 CH #7[...]

  • Page 538

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 512 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t he circu it card are sho wn in the ta ble belo w . Note: Depe nding on the type o f the con n ected ISD N term inal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp may fla s h w h e n t h e te r m in a l i s [...]

  • Page 539

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 513 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on the ci rcuit card are shown in the table bel o w . SWITC H SWIT CH NO . SE TTING ST AND AR D SE TTING ME ANING MB ON Make bus y of the circuit card . OFF × Nor mal setting SW00 1O N × Fix e d to al l O N . 2O N ?[...]

  • Page 540

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 514 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t OFF • Short P assi ve Bus mod e: Th is mode i s a lso a poi nt-t o-mul tipoi nt m ode, in whi ch a ma ximu m of eight term inal s can b e connec ted anywhe re o n the b u s. Note that th e bus l ength i s limited to 200 m in th is case. • Exten ded Pas si ve Bus [...]

  • Page 541

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 515 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit Note: Adj ust each k e y accor d ing to the spe cif icat ion of each ISDN terminal . SWITC H SWIT CH NO . SE TTING ST AND AR D SE TTING ME ANING SW05 1 ON PAD Level Ad justment: OFF × 2 ON OFF × 3O F F × Fixed to OFF. 4O F F × Fixed to OFF. 5O F F × Not u sed 6O F[...]

  • Page 542

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 516 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t SWITC H SWITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MODE0 0 × Fix e d to 0. 1 F Not us ed MODE1 0 5 Not us ed 6 × Fix e d to 6. 7 F Not us ed[...]

  • Page 543

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 517 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit 6. E x te rn al I nter face Figur e 3 -156 LT C on n ec tor Le ad Acco m mo d atio n (1/2) See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m. ( Figur e 3-157 ) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 [...]

  • Page 544

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 518 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t Figur e 3 -156 LT C on n ec tor Le ad Acco m mo d atio n (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 0[...]

  • Page 545

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 519 Revision 1.0 PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Ci rcuit Figur e 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram RA RB TA TB TA RA RB TB MDF ILC Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100 Ω ) TE RA RB TA TB TA RA RB TB MDF ILC Modular Rossete TE TE TA RA RB TB RA TA TA RB RA TA TA RB Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100 Ω )[...]

  • Page 546

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 520 Revision 1.0 PA- 8ILCE -A ISDN Terminal Line Circui t 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SL OT NO . SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MB SW0 0 SW0 1 SW0 2 SW0 3 SW0 4 SW0 5 SW0 6 MODE0 MODE1 ON 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 6[...]

  • Page 547

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 521 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA D igital A n nouncement T runk PA-4DATA Dig ital Announ cem en t T ru nk 1. General Fu nction The PA-4DATA ( D AT) cir cuit card is use d as a Digit al Announcement Tr unk support ing servic e featu res rela ted to announcement function such a s Automated Att e ndant , Delay Announcement Att endant[...]

  • Page 548

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 522 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA Digital Announcemen t T runk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition Th e P A - 4 D A T A ( D A T ) ca r d c a n be m ount e d i n an y u n i v ers a l sl ot a s s ho w n b e low. Note: In dicates u niver sal sl ots for line/t runk ci rcui t cards. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 0 11 [...]

  • Page 549

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 523 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA D igital A n nouncement T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face la yout of l a mps, switc hes, and c onnectors on th is circuit card is shown in Figure 3-159 . Figure 3-159 F ace Lay out of PA-4DATA (DAT) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons of thi [...]

  • Page 550

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 524 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA Digital Announcemen t T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of var ious switches on this circu it card a re shown in th e tabl e b elow. Note 4: V alid in the case of recording or play back from a te lephone set. SWITC H SWITCH NO . SETT ING ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING MB (SW11) UP Circ ui[...]

  • Page 551

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 525 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA D igital A n nouncement T runk SW IT CH SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST AND A RD SETTI NG ME ANIN G SW 6 1 ON Single pl ayback by No. 0 Ci rcuit Note 5 OFF Multipl e pl ayback by No. 0 Circ uit 2 ON Single pl ayback by No. 1 Ci rcuit Note 5 OFF Multipl e pl ayback by No. 1 Circ uit 3 ON Single pl ayback by[...]

  • Page 552

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 526 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA Digital Announcemen t T runk Note 6: When this cir c uit car d is usi ng an e x ternal music -on-hold sour ce, set 0, 4 or 6 b y timer m ode. SWI TCH SWITCH NO . SETTIN G ST AND A RD SET T IN G MEANI NG MRCS (SW9) Note 6 E Set t o E while the circu it card is u sing as announ cemen t equipm ent onl[...]

  • Page 553

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 527 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA D igital A n nouncement T runk 6. E x te rn al I nter face When this ci rcui t card is u sed as a n exter nal m u sic-o n-ho ld sou rce, the follo wing l eads (FM , E ) app ear fro m the LT connec tor . Fig ure 3-160 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3[...]

  • Page 554

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 528 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA Digital Announcemen t T runk [Refer en ce] How to R ecord a Me ssag e • Prior t o yo ur r ecording , set switche s on the DAT card according to the following exampl e. • Connect a tape rec order to the DAT card with a cabl e. • Turn On t he MBRQ key to make busy a c hannel to be recorde d. (T[...]

  • Page 555

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 529 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA D igital A n nouncement T runk • Star t the tape rec ord er and r eco rd y o u r message in the designated ch annel . - recording - • The corr espondin g BL l amp (BL0 ~ BL 7) lig hts steadily. (Recording ends .) • Retur n the START, WR key to the previous position. How to P la y Ba ck t h e [...]

  • Page 556

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 530 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATA Digital Announcemen t T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SW ITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 ST AR T (SW8 ) MRCS (SW9 ) MBREQ (SW1 0) WE (SW1 2) MB DOWN Cir cuit card make bus y cancel 1 2 3 4 ON 123 4 ON 123 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 234 56 78 ON 123[...]

  • Page 557

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 531 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB D igital A n nouncement T runk PA-4DATB Dig ital Announ cem en t T ru nk 1. General Fu nction The PA-4DATB (DAT) cir cuit ca rd i s used as a Digital Announc ement Trunk s upporting servic e featu res rela ted to announcement function such a s Automated Att e ndant , Delay Announcement Att endant ,[...]

  • Page 558

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 532 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB Digital Announcemen t T runk 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be m ounted in any univ ersa l slots as sh o wn be low. Note: I ndicat es univer sal slots for l ine/trunk c ir cuit ca rd s. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20[...]

  • Page 559

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 533 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB D igital A n nouncement T runk 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face la yout of l a mps, switc hes, and c onnectors on th is circuit card is shown in Figure 3-162 . Figure 3-162 F ace Lay out of PA-4DATB (DAT) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons of thi [...]

  • Page 560

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 534 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB Digital Announcemen t T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SW IT CH SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST AND AR D SETTI NG MEANING M B U P C ir c ui t c ar d m a ke bus y DO W N × C ir c ui t c a r d m a ke bus y ca nc el MBRQ 1-4 ON [...]

  • Page 561

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 535 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB D igital A n nouncement T runk SW IT CH SWITCH NO . SETTI N G ST ANDARD SETTI NG MEANING SW5 1 2 3 ON × Com p ressi o n L aw: µ -la w OFF Compress ion Law: A-la w 4 ON T o be used as ext ern al hol d t one so urc e O FF T o b e used as a nnoun cemen t e quipment SW6 1 ON Sing l e pla yb a ck o f [...]

  • Page 562

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 536 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB Digital Announcemen t T runk SW IT CH SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST AND AR D SETTI NG MEANING SW 7 1 ON Activ ation of RAM Test OFF × Normal S ett ing 2 ON Port Mi croprocess or is res et when MBR ke y i s ON. OFF × Port Microp rocessor is not rese t when MBR key i s ON. 3O F F × Not use d 4O F F × N[...]

  • Page 563

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 537 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB D igital A n nouncement T runk 6. E x te rn al I nter face When thi s ca rd i s u s ed as a n ext ern a l mus i c-o n-h o l d s o u rce , the foll o w ing cab l e connec t i on is re q u ire d . Fig ure 3-163 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 [...]

  • Page 564

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 538 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB Digital Announcemen t T runk [Refer en ce] • Prior t o yo ur r ecording , set switche s on the D AT card according to the foll owing ex ample. • Connect a tape rec order to the D A T c ard with a cable. • T urn On the key to make b usy a channel to be recor ded. (T o rec ord a me ssag e in th[...]

  • Page 565

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 539 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB D igital A n nouncement T runk • Star t the tape rec ord er and r eco rd y o u r message in the designated ch annel . - re co rding - • The corr espondin g BL l amp (BL0 - BL7) l ight s steadi l y. (Rec ording end s.) • Retur n the ST AR T , WR k ey to the pre vious po sition. Playba ck from [...]

  • Page 566

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 540 Revision 1.0 PA-4DATB Digital Announcemen t T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SW ITCH NAME S W ITCH SHAP E R EMARKS MB ST AR T WR MBRQ MRCS SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 JP0 ON ON ON 3 1 0 2 1 2 3 4 123 4 123 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1234 567 8 123 4 RIGHT LEF T[...]

  • Page 567

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 541 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test PH-M16 Line T est 1. General Fu nction This c ircuit car d cont rolled b y CPU is used for line t est of a subscribe r ’ s line . The c irc uit c ard suppo rts to send howler tone to external te st equipmen t, besides th e cir cui t card can detect or sen d vari ous tones, and send PB (DT[...]

  • Page 568

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 542 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The LTST ci rcu i t c ard ca n b e ac com m odate d in th e s haded s lo ts (00, 01, 02 ) as show n below . Note: This c ircuit card is use d for 1- IMG Syst em. 00 01 02 03 04 PH-M16 PH-M16 PH-M16 LPM Mounting Module[...]

  • Page 569

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 543 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes and Connec tors The fac e layout of lamps, swi tches and connector s on this circui t card is s hown in Figure 3-165 . Figu re 3-165 Face Layou t of PH- M16 (LT ST) Car d Note: CRIN is used to conne ct with CRIN t e st equipme nt. MB SW0 OPE/MB CRIN[...]

  • Page 570

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 544 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test 4. Lamp Indica tions The ta ble be low shows lamp indicati ons on t his circui t card. 5. Switch Setti ngs The follo w ing is a br ief des cription of the swit ches on this c ircuit ca rd. When a swi tch has a st andard se t tin g , it is ind i ca te d w i th “ X ” in the ta ble below.[...]

  • Page 571

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 545 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fig ure 3-166 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 TM BELL0A BELL1A TELA LCA THOWA ONHK TCR ATM ATA OUTA TA1 EXMN MJ0A MN0[...]

  • Page 572

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 546 Revision 1.0 PH- M16 Line Test Figur e 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram B A E M RA RB TA TB TM TE OUTA OUTB INA INB TA1 TB1 LTST ODT LC MDF PBX[...]

  • Page 573

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 547 Revision 1.0 PH-M16 Line Test 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REM ARKS MB SW0 ON(MB) OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON[...]

  • Page 574

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 548 Revision 1.0 PA- 4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk PA-4AMPC AMP Po ol Tr un k 1. General Fu nction This c i rcuit c ard i s b idirect ional amplifi er circuit ry t o be use d for such a purpo se as level g uarante eing in a public line — tie line conne ction. The ci rcuit ca rd is provid e d with four bidirect ional amplifier circ[...]

  • Page 575

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 549 Revision 1.0 PA-4A MPC AMP Po ol Trun k 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mount ing locations of t his circuit card a re shown below. Note: Indic ates unive rsal slots f or line/tr unk circuit cards. 01 02 03 04 0 5 0 6 07 08 09 10 11 1 2 1 3 14 15 16 1 7 18 19 20 2 1 22 2 3 00 PIM Mounting Module[...]

  • Page 576

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 550 Revision 1.0 PA- 4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne ctors The face la yout of l a mps, switc hes, and c onnectors of this circuit car d is shown in F igu re 3-169 . Figu re 3-169 Face Layout of PA -4 AMPC ( 4AMP ) 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons of thi s circ uit [...]

  • Page 577

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 551 Revision 1.0 PA-4A MPC AMP Po ol Trun k 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of var ious switches on this circu it card a re shown in th e tabl e b elow. SWITCH SWITCH SETTING STANDAR D ME ANING NA ME NO. SETTING (MB) UP Circuit ca rd make busy DOWN × Circuit card ma ke busy canc el 0 ON The cor respon ding c ircuit [...]

  • Page 578

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 552 Revision 1.0 PA- 4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk SWITCH SWITC H SETTING STANDA RD MEANING NAME NO. SETTING SW03 SW04 is set t o all ON. SW10 Right (SIG) Bo th E Ca (Publi c Line) si de and ECb (Tie Line) side ope rat e. Left (CAS) × Only ECa (P ubli c Line) side oper ate s. SW11 Right (SIG) Bo th E Ca (Publi c Line) si de and ECb[...]

  • Page 579

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 553 Revision 1.0 PA-4A MPC AMP Po ol Trun k 6. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLOT N O. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM SW01 SW 02 SW00 (MB) SW 03 Cir cu i t ca r d ma k e busy ca nc el ON 12 3 4 ON 1 234 5 678 3 2 1 0 SW04 SW11 SW12 DOWN Make bus y switch o f t he corre spondin g circ uit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circ ui ts) ON :[...]

  • Page 580

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 554 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk PA -8TL TR Tie Lin e Tru n k 1. General Fu nction The PA- 8TLTR(TLT) cir cuit card provides e ight t runks whos e inte rface c an be se lecte d among the foll owing four typ es by key setting on a 4-c hannel b asis. • Loop Dia ling (LD) • Direct In w ard D ia l ing ( DID ) ?[...]

  • Page 581

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 555 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk 2. Mountin g Location / Con dition The PA-8TLTR (TLT) ca rd can be mount ed in any universal slo ts as shown belo w. Note: I ndicates unive rsal slots for line /trunk circui t cards. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 1 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23[...]

  • Page 582

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 556 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switche s, and Conne ctors The face la yout of l a mps, switc hes, and c onnectors of this circuit car d is shown in F igu re 3-171 . Figure 3-171 F ace Layou t of P A-8TLTR (TLT ) Card 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons of thi s cir[...]

  • Page 583

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 557 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SW IT CH S WITCH NO . SETT ING ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANING MB (SW00) UP Circ uit card make busy DOWN × C ircuit card make busy cance l MB0 - 7 (SW01) 0 ON Make bu sy of th[...]

  • Page 584

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 558 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk SWI TCH SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG ST AND ARD SETTI NG ME ANIN G SW 0 (SW10) 1 2 3 4O F F × Not use d 5O F F × Fixed 6O N × Fixed 7O F F × Fixed 8O F F × Not use d SW 1 (SW15) 1 ON Program mable PAD P0 Value 0.5 d B P0 v alu e i s determi ned as a su m of select ed PAD value s o[...]

  • Page 585

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 559 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk SWI TCH SWITCH NO . SETT ING ST ANDARD SET T IN G MEANING SW2 (SW2 0) 1 ON P r ogra mmable PAD P1 Va lue 0. 5 dB P1 val ue i s deter mined as a su m of se le cted P AD va lu es of SW2 (e lements 1-5). Note th at this se tting is val id fo r 4W E&M sy stem . - E x am pl e - I[...]

  • Page 586

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 560 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk Note: For th e setting range of Progr ammable PAD Values, see the “ Settin g Rang e of Programmable PAD Values ” shown for SW1. SWITC H SWITCH NO . SE T TI NG ST AND ARD SETTI NG MEANI NG SW3 (SW2 5) 1 ON P rogra mmable PAD P2 Value 0. 5 dB P2 Va lues i s t ota l of PAD Value[...]

  • Page 587

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 561 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk SWITC H SWITCH NO . SE TTIN G ST AND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW 4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Cir cuit] SW 5 (SW40) [No. 4- 7 Cir cuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as LD /D ID) 1 ~ 4 Sett ing of Ter minat ing Impe dance and Bala n cin g N et work (Valid for LD/DID) 5O F F × Fixed 6O F F × No[...]

  • Page 588

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 562 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk SW IT CH SW ITCH NO . SETTING ST AND ARD SETT ING ME ANIN G SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Cir cuit] SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Cir cuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as 2W E& M) 1 ~ 4, 6 Set ti ng of T ermi nati ng Impedanc e and B alanc ing Netw o rk (Vali d for E&M) 5O F F × Not use d 6[...]

  • Page 589

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 563 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk Refere n ce : Tabl e of F ixed PADs :When SW2-8 is set to “ ON ” . (other than the case of ) :When SW2-8 is set to “ OFF ” . (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Au stral ia) ARTD COMMAND P AD D A T A P AD V ALUE [dB] 4W E&M LD/2W E &M SEND RECE IVE SEN D REC[...]

  • Page 590

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 564 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk 6. Ext erna l In terf a ce Accommodat ion of LT conn ector leads of this ci rcuit card is shown in F igure 3 -172 . See also: Connectin g Route Di agram (LD/DID ∞ 2W E&M) Connectin g Route Diagra m (4W E&M) 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodat ion 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lea d A cco[...]

  • Page 591

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 565 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk Figur e 3 -172 LT C on n ec tor Le ad Acco m mo d atio n (2/2) PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 0[...]

  • Page 592

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 566 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk Fig ure 3-173 Conne ct ing Rout e Di ag r am ( LD/DID • 2W E&M) PBX A0 B0 A7 B7 A B A B NETWORK LT Connector Installation Cable PA-8TLTR • LD/DID • 2W E&M PBX A0 B0 A B LT Connector Installation Cable PA-8TLTR E0 E M0 M A3 B3 A B E3 E M3 M A4 B4 A B E4 E M4 M A7 B7 [...]

  • Page 593

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 567 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk Figur e 3-174 Co nnectin g Route Diagram (4W E&M) • 4W E&M PBX A0(TA0) B0(TB0) TA TB LT Connector Installation Cable PA-8TLTR RA0 RA RB0 RB 4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT 4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT 4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT 2400 ODT CABLE ODT connector E0 E M0 M A4(TA4) B4(TB4)[...]

  • Page 594

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 568 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk Fig ure 3-175 “ 2400 O D T CABLE ” L ead Accommod ati on 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (A[...]

  • Page 595

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 569 Revision 1.0 PA- 8T LT R Tie Li ne T runk Fig ure 3-176 “ 2400 O D T CABLE-A ” Lead Accommoda tion RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS[...]

  • Page 596

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 570 Revision 1.0 PA -8TL TR Tie Li ne T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODU LE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MB (S W 00) MB0-7 (S W 01) SW0 (S W 10) SW1 (S W 15) SW2 (S W 20) SW3 (S W 25) SW4 (S W 30) SW5 (S W 40) ON 8 ON 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 123 4 5 678 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7[...]

  • Page 597

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 571 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er PA-M87 Recor ding / P aging De vice Adapter 1. General Fu nction This circ uit card is used to provide an inter face between the Attenda nt Console(s) and the ext ernal recordi ng/paging equipment a s shown in the fig ure below. Occupying ever y two slots with in[...]

  • Page 598

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 572 Revision 1.0 PA- M87 Recording / P aging D evice A dap ter 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The mo unting locat ions of thi s cir cuit card a re s hown below. N ote that this circu i t card re quires a vacancy of two consecuti ve slots. Note: Indic ates univer sal sl ots for line/ trunk cir cuit car ds. PIM Mounting Mod[...]

  • Page 599

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 573 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors Face layo ut of each lamp, switch and connector on this c ircuit c ard is shown i n Figure 3-178 . Figure 3-17 8 Face La yout of PA-M87 (RECC /P GADP) 4. Lamp Indica tions The table below shows the meaning of [...]

  • Page 600

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 574 Revision 1.0 PA- M87 Recording / P aging D evice A dap ter 5. Switch Setti ngs Switch set tings on the card a nd their detailed meanings ar e as f ollows: Note 1: This swit ch setting becomes eff ect ive p a rallel wit h the key op erations of SW 12 and S W13. Note 2: T o validate this sw itc h sett ing, also oper ate t[...]

  • Page 601

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 575 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er Wa r n i ng : When the Remote Phone is not used, be sur e to tur n the SW11 to the left side . If the switc h ke y is left on the ri ght side, t he mach ine component s may be damaged by over cu rren t. Note 3: T o validate this sw itc h sett ing, also oper ate t[...]

  • Page 602

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 576 Revision 1.0 PA- M87 Recording / P aging D evice A dap ter 6. E x te rn al I nter face The l oca tion of RE C/P GA connect or l ead s and their conne c tion diagra m are shown in Figur e 3-179 . Figu re 3-179 R E C/P G A Co nn ecto r Lea ds See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m. ( Figur e 3-180 ) Location of REC/PGA Conn[...]

  • Page 603

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 577 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er Figu re 3-180 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (1/4 ) PBX RECC/ PGADP B0 A0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B KB LA LB A B KA MDF To ATT To Recording/ Paging machine Note 3 50FLT-CHAMP CABLE Front connector [ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging acti[...]

  • Page 604

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 578 Revision 1.0 PA- M87 Recording / P aging D evice A dap ter Figu re 3-180 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (2/4 ) PBX RECC/ PGADP B0 A0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B KB LA LB A B T0C KA MDF To ATT 50FLT-CHAMP CABLE [ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ] Speech Signal Lead[...]

  • Page 605

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 579 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er Figu re 3-180 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (3/4 ) PBX RECC/ PGADP B0 A0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B KB LA LB T0C ZA ZB L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C ZA ZB A0 KA MDF To ATT 50FLT-CHAMP CABLE RECC/ PGADP 50FLT-CHAMP CABLE B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B KA KB LA LB A B A B To ATT [ I[...]

  • Page 606

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 580 Revision 1.0 PA- M87 Recording / P aging D evice A dap ter Figu re 3-180 Conne cting Rou te D iagr am (4/4 ) PBX RECC/ PGADP B0 A0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B B M E T0C A MDF To TLT 50FLT-CHAMP CABLE [ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ] Front connector To Paging Machine E&M S[...]

  • Page 607

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 581 Revision 1.0 PA-M87 Reco r ding / Paging Dev ice Adapt er 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet SWITCH NAME S WITCH SHAPE REMARKS SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 VR0 (V ol ume R esi st ance ) VR1 (V ol ume R esi st ance ) ON 1 234 5 678 3 2 1 Left Ri g ht 3 2 1 UP DOWN 3 2 1 UP DOWN[...]

  • Page 608

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 582 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A P rim ar y R ate Interface Trunk PA-24PRTB-A Pri mary Rat e Inter fac e Trun k 1. General Fu nction Th e P A- 2 4P R TB -A ( PR T ) c ir c u it c ard is a di g i ta l in t er fa ce s u p po r ti n g voi c e and d a t a co m m un ic ati on s a t 1.5 M bi t/sec. Being equippe d with a Link Acce ss[...]

  • Page 609

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 583 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface T runk 2. Mountin g Location / Con dition The PA- 24PRTB-A (24P RT) card c an b e mount ed in th e fol lowing shaded unive rsa l slots as shown bel ow. Note: This c ar d cannot be mounte d in s lot 5. This car d cannot use Gr oup0 (G=00) of Uni t0 (U=0) of ev en-number Mod[...]

  • Page 610

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 584 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A P rim ar y R ate Interface Trunk 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indicati ons on this cir cuit ca rd ar e shown in the t a ble below. Table 3-15 PA-2 4 PRTB-A Lam p Indication Reference LAMP NAME COL OR ST A TE OPE Green Remains li t while thi s c ir c uit card is in norma l oper at [...]

  • Page 611

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 585 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface T runk 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own in th e table belo w. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI N G ST ANDARD SETTI NG MEANING MB UP Circuit card ma ke bu s y DOWN × Circuit card ma ke busy cancel MO DE 5 A T& T (#4/# 5 [...]

  • Page 612

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 586 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A P rim ar y R ate Interface Trunk SWITC H NAME SWI TCH NO . SETTIN G ST AND A RD SET T IN G MEANI NG SW1 1O F F × Sta ndard sett ing (Digit al PAD/ROM s electi on) 2O N × Fixed 3 ON Int erf ace structure : 24B OFF × Interf ace structure : 23B + D 4 ON D channe l packet servi ce is provide d. O[...]

  • Page 613

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 587 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface T runk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO . S ETTI NG ST A ND ARD SETT ING MEANING SW 4 1O F F × Fixed (D channe l) 2 ON × D Channel Mode Se lecti on; Used Si de OFF D Cha nnel Mode Se lecti on; Ne twork S ide 3 ON D Channe l Signa l Logic; Nega tive OFF × D Channe l Signal L ogic; [...]

  • Page 614

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 588 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A P rim ar y R ate Interface Trunk Digital P AD Setting Table f or PA-24PRTB-A This car d is equipped wit h a mask ROM in whic h the followi ng typical PAD patte rns have b een already writt en. PAD value is dete rmined by selecting a desir ed PAD pat tern, which ca n be done by key setti ng of th[...]

  • Page 615

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 589 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface T runk 6. E x te rn al I nter face Fig ure 3-183 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 184 ). PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 [...]

  • Page 616

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 590 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A P rim ar y R ate Interface Trunk Figur e 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB RA TA TB RB DIU1A DIU1B PLO PBX MDF clock extraction 24 PRT To DSU (Digital Service Unit) Note IN OUT Connectin g Route Diagra m for the P A-24P R TB-A circui t car d is as f ollo ws. Note: As an e xa[...]

  • Page 617

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 591 Revision 1.0 PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface T runk 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODULE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS PIM MODE LB SW 0 SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 MB DO WN Circuit card make busy cance l 3 2 1 0 ON 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8[...]

  • Page 618

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 592 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface PA-2 4D T R (D TI) Dig ital T runk Inter face 1. General Fu nction The P A-24 DTR (24DT I ) circui t card p rovides an inter face bet we en 24 d igital tr unks an d the sys tem at 1.544 M bit/s. Thi s card can b e also used as an inte rface for a Common Channel[...]

  • Page 619

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 593 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-24DTR (DTI) card c an be mount ed in the foll owing shaded s lots as shown belo w. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Un ive rs a l S l o t s Un i v ers al Sl ot s[...]

  • Page 620

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 594 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layout of lamps, switch es, and connector s on this circui t card is sho wn in Figur e 3- 1 86 . Note that there are t wo typ es of PA-24DTR (DTI) card s which d iffer in thei r face la youts. Figu [...]

  • Page 621

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 595 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . LA MP NAM E C O LO R ST A TE OPE Green Remain s lit while thi s c ircuit card i s in nor ma l oper at ion . N-OPE Red Remain s lit while thi s cir[...]

  • Page 622

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 596 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . Note: This s witc h setting is applicab l e for a system adopts Asso ciated Channel Inte ro ffi ce Signa lling (A CIS). Figu re 3-187 Ava ilabl e Locat [...]

  • Page 623

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 597 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW15/ 25 1 ON × Impedance Sett ing : 100 [ Ω ] OFF Impeda nce Setting : 110 [ Ω ] 2 ON Transform er a t Middle Point - Tran smissio n: Ground OFF × Trans former at Middle Poin t - T ran smiss i[...]

  • Page 624

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 598 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI N G S T ANDARD SETTING MEANING SW10/4D 1 ON Transmiss ion Sig nal A Logic: Nega tive OFF × Transm ission Sig nal A Lo gic: Posi tive 2 ON Rece iving Signa l A Logi c: Negat ive OFF × Rece iving Signa l A Logi c: Pos itive 3 ON R[...]

  • Page 625

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 599 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW12/ 58 4 ON PAD Patte rn Select ion Note: W h en s ett i ng t his key , refe r to Di git a l P AD S e tt ing Ta b l e . OFF × 5 ON × OFF 6 ON × OFF 7 ON × Alarm S ending whe n this circuit ca r[...]

  • Page 626

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 600 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW13/ 6C 1 ON × Fixed t o all ON. OFF 2 ON × OFF 3 ON × OFF 4 ON × OFF 5 ON × OFF 6 ON × OFF 7 ON × OFF 8 ON × Netfus ing : Not use d OFF Netfus ing : used[...]

  • Page 627

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 601 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface Digital P AD Setting Tab l e for PA-24DTR (DTI) As mentione d in Genera l Function, this card is equi pped with a mask R OM in which the follo wi ng typical P AD pat- terns ha v e been already writte n. P AD v alue is determine d by sele cting a desire d P AD p[...]

  • Page 628

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 602 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face The le ads a ppe ar as fol lo ws o n th e L T con nec to rs . Fig ure 3-188 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 189 ). 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 [...]

  • Page 629

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 603 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface Figur e 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram TA TB RA RB POUTA POUTB TA RA RB TB DIU1A DIU1B PLO PBX MDF Note 1 DTI CARRIER EQUIPMENT Note 2 OUT IN Note 1: Th i s c able conne c tion is r equi r ed when clo c k signals must b e ex tracted f rom the ne twork sid e. No[...]

  • Page 630

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 604 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D TI ) Digital T runk Interface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODU LE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWIT CH SHAP E REMARKS PIM SW01/ 13B SW10/ 4D • 4-multifr a me DTI Standa rd • 12-multi frame DTI Standard SW11/ 39 • 24-multi frame DTI Standard • 12-multi frame DTI Standard SW13/ 6C • Fi xed t[...]

  • Page 631

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 605 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface PA-2 4D T R (D LI) Digi t al L ine I nte rf ac e 1. General Fu nction Th e P A - 24 D TR ( 2 4D L I) c ir cu i t c ar d p rov id e s a n i n te rf ac e be tw e e n 2 4 d ig ital l in es a n d t he sy st e m at 1. 54 4 Mbit/s . T o obtain a ppropriate spee ch l ev[...]

  • Page 632

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 606 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface 2. Mountin g Location/ Condition The P A-24DTR (DLI) card c an be mount ed in the foll owing shaded s lots as shown belo w. PIM Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Un ive rs a l S l o t s Un i v ers al Sl ot s[...]

  • Page 633

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 607 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface 3. Fac e Layout of La mps, Switc hes, and Conne ctors The face layout of lamps, switch es, and connector s on this circui t card is sho wn in Figur e 3- 1 91 . Note that there are t wo typ es of PA-24DTR (DLI) card s which d iffer in thei r face la youts. Figu re[...]

  • Page 634

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 608 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface 4. Lamp Indica tions The con tents of la mp indications on t his c ircuit c ard a re sho wn in the ta ble be low . LAM P N A ME CO LO R ST A TE OPE Gre en Remains l it while this circu it c ard is in normal op erat ion. N- OP E R ed R e m a ins lit wh il e thi [...]

  • Page 635

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 609 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface 5. Switch Setti ngs Standa rd settings of swi tches on this cir cuit card are sh own i n t he table belo w . Figu re 3-192 Ava ilabl e Locat io ns f or Loop back Te sting SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW00 (MB) UP Circuit card m ak[...]

  • Page 636

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 610 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW15/ 25 1 ON × Impedance Setting : 100 [ Ω ] OFF Impeda nce Setting : 110 [ Ω ] 2 ON Transform er a t Middle Point - Tran smissio n: Ground OFF × Trans former at Middle Poin t - T ran smiss io[...]

  • Page 637

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 611 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW10/ 4D 1 ON Transmis sion Signal A L ogic: Negative OFF × Transmi ssion Signa l A Logi c: Pos itiv e 2 ON Receivin g Signal A Logic : Negati ve OFF × Recei ving S ignal A L ogic: Pos itive 3 ON RMT[...]

  • Page 638

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 612 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface SWITC H NAME SWITCH NO . SETTI NG ST ANDARD SETTI NG M EANING SW12/ 58 4 ON PAD Patte rn Select ion Note: W h en s ett in g th i s ke y, r efe r t o D igi ta l PA D S e ttin g Ta bl e . OFF × 5 ON × OFF 6 ON × OFF 7 ON × Alarm S ending whe n this circuit ca[...]

  • Page 639

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 613 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface Note: This P AD va lue table i s P AD pat t e rn 1. I f other P AD pat t e rn is r eq uired, assign P A D pa ttern by element s 4~6 of SW12/ 58. The element s become vali d when assigni ng ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit 5=1. When ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5= 0, PAD value is “ [...]

  • Page 640

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 614 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface Digital P AD Setting Tab l e for PA-24DTR (DLI) As mentione d in Genera l Function, this card is equi pped with a mask R OM in which the follo wi ng typical P AD pat- terns ha v e been already writte n. P AD v alue is determine d by sele cting a desire d P AD p[...]

  • Page 641

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 615 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface 6. E x te rn al I nter face The le ads a ppe ar as fol lo ws o n th e L T con nec to rs . Fig ure 3-193 L T Conne c tor L ead Accommod ation See al so Connec ting Route Diagra m ( Figure 3- 194 ). PIM Mounting Module 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4[...]

  • Page 642

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 616 Revision 1.0 PA -2 4 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Li n e Interface Figur e 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram TA TB RA RB TA RA RB TB PBX MDF DLI TERMINAL EQUIPMENT OUT IN Connect ing R out e Diagr am f or the P A -24DTR (DLI) cir cuit card is as follo ws.[...]

  • Page 643

    NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 617 Revision 1.0 PA - 24 D TR ( D LI ) Digital Line Interface 7. Switch Setti ng Sheet MODU LE SLO T NO . SWITCH NAME SWIT CH SHAP E REMARKS PIM S W00 (MB) SW01/ 13B SW10/ 4D • 24-multi frame DLI Standard • 12-multi frame DLI Standard SW11/ 39 • 24-multi frame DLI Standard • 12-multi frame DLI Standard SW13/ 6C SW12[...]

  • Page 644

    CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 Page 618 Revision 1.0 This page is f or your notes.[...]